HBM MGCplusAB22A

Operating Manual
Amplifier system
MGCplus
with display and control panel
AB22A/AB32
B0534-18.0 en
sdjki
Contents
A Introduction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MGCplus housing versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the MGCplus device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert communications processor CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules in the MGCsplit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 Measurement module, enclosure 1SH400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement module, enclosure 1SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor modules 1SH400CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display for modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to MGCplus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3 A-8 A-10 A-13 A-15 A-17 A-20

A-21 A-22 A-23 A-24 A-27 A-32
8 9
Conditions on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-35 A-36
MGCplus with AB22A/AB32
B Connecting
1 Connection: desktop housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-3 B-4 B-6
2 3 4
Connecting the ABX22A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Connecting separate TEDS modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVDT-Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a single strain gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.8 4.8.1 Compensating resistor external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compensating resistor external with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single strain gage with AP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single strain gage with AP814Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single strain gage with AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SG systems and rosettes on AP815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP460i Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-8 B-11 B-12

B-13 B-14 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 B-19 B-20 B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 B-26 B-26 B-28
Torque flange T10FSF1, T10FSU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2 4.8.3 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.10
Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) with reference signal . . . . . . . . Torque measurement (square-wave excitation voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation speed measurement (asymmetrical signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-29 B-31 B-33 B-33 B-35 B-37 B-37 B-38 B-41 B-42 B-44 B-48 B-49 B-51 B-52 B-53 B-55 B-56 B-57 B-58 B-59 B-60
Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 Torque measurement (slip ring or direct cable connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement (T4WA-S3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.3 Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 4.23
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC voltage sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency measurement without a direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency measurement with direction of rotation signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active and passive piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometric transducers (singlechannel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometric transducers (Multichannel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection via distributor board VT814i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection via distributor board VT810/815i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 5.2 5.3 Split-line-cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply units NT650/NT651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amplifier modules and connection boards in the 1SH400 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 5.3.2 Amplifier modules that can be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-62
B-62 B-63 B-73 B-73 B-74
5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14
Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs/outputs for measurement modules SH400/SH650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP409 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP401 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP815i connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP460i connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP13i connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP17 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP71 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP78 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP75 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-75 B-76 B-77 B-78 B-79 B-80 B-81 B-85 B-89 B-90 B-93
Connecting CANHEAD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 6.2 ML74 communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP74 connection board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-96
B-97 B-98
7 8 9
Connecting the computer, PLC and printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a shunt resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs, Outputs and remotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 9.2 9.3 Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue output on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection boards AP01i...AP18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP13i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-99 B-100 B-101

B-101 B-104 B-105 B-106 B-111 B-113 B-116 B-119
9.3.2
Installing the EM001 final stage module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP07/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP08/14/17/18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-120 B-121 B-122 B-124
C Commissioning
1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-3
C-4
D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32

1 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 AB22A control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB32 control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
D-3 D-4
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 2.3 The first display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages on the AB22A/AB32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-5
D-5 D-6 D-10
AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Calling up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quitting menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel selection in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel selection in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-11
D-13 D-14 D-15 D-16
3.5 3.6 3.7
Saving the set-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elements in the set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-17 D-18 D-19
E Measure
1 2 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic measurement channel set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Extended functions of the ML38B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEDS transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3 E-4
E-6 E-7 E-9 E-13 E-16 E-17
Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 SG transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.3 3.2.1 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of torque characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring with the built-in shunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-20
E-20 E-21 E-24 E-27 E-29 E-31 E-32 E-34 E-37 E-39 E-41
Strain gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10
Adapting the rotation-speed channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 3.7.1 3.8.1 3.9.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current and voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistance temperature detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impulse counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-45 E-49 E-50 E-52 E-53 E-55 E-56 E-58 E-59 E-61 E-62
Piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Connecting and measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special case: initial charge is known . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-66
E-68 E-70 E-72 E-73 E-74
Drift balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current-fed piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-75
E-76
Piezoresistive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-78
E-79 E-81
Potentiometric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Measuring transducer characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-83
E-84 E-86
10
F Additional functions
1 Remote (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 Switching on remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning remote contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-3
F-3 F-4
Limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 2.2 2.3 Activate limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection keys in the menu Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-6
F-7 F-8 F-11
3 4
Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting peak values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combine peak value stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peak value operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current value operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Envelope curve operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear peak value store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-12 F-15
F-15 F-16 F-18 F-19 F-20 F-21 F-22
5 6
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-23 F-24
11
G Display
1 Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 Select set-up window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up window Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up window components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.5 Numerical display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-3
G-4 G-5 G-6 G-7 G-17 G-21 G-22
Status limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 F-keys in measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-keys in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-23
G-23 G-26
Channel names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-27
H System
1 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Define new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set operator access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-3
H-4 H-5 H-6 H-7 H-8
Save/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-9
12
Recording measurement series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Setting the measurement series parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-14
H-15
4 5 6 7
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-32 H-37 H-38 H-39
I J
1
Menu structure Specifications

Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML10B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML35B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML38B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML50B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML60B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-3
J-3 J-5 J-8 J-11 J-13 J-15 J-17 J-19 J-21 J-24
13
2 3 4 5
Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-channel amplifier module ML455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multichannel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multichannel amplifier connection boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-26 J-34 J-36 J-41 J-51 J-52 J-53 J-56 J-58 J-59 J-60 J-63
6 7 8 9
Programmable plugin module ML70B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with AP71 (CANbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication module ML74 with AP74 (CANHEAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication module ML77B with AP77 (Profibus DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K Index
14
A-1
Introduction
A-2
Introduction Safety instructions
A-3
Safety instructions
Use in accordance with the regulations The amplifier system is to be used exclusively for measurement tasks and directly related control tasks. Use for any purpose other than the above shall be deemed to be not in accordance with the regulations. To ensure safe operation, the device may only be operated in accordance with the information given in the Operating Manual. It is also essential to comply with the legal and safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories. General dangers due to non-observance of the safety instructions The amplifier system is a state-ofthe-art device and is fail-safe. The device may give rise to further dangers if it is inappropriately installed and operated by untrained personnel. Any person instructed to carry out installation, commissioning, maintenance or repair of the device must have read and understood the Operating Manual and in particular the technical safety instructions. Remaining dangers The scope of supply and list of components provided with the amplifier system cover only part of the scope of measurement technique. In addition, equipment planners, installers and operators should plan, implement and respond to the safety engineering considerations of measurement technique in such a way as to minimise remaining dangers. Prevailing regulations must be complied with at all times. There must be reference to the remaining dangers connected with measurement technique. After setting up and password protected activities, care must be taken to ensure that any control units that may be connected remain in a safe and secure state until the switching behaviour of the amplifier system has been checked.
A-4
Any risk of remaining dangers when working with the amplifier system is pointed out in this introduction by means of the following symbols:
Symbol:
DANGER
Meaning: Maximum danger level Warns of a decidedly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements will lead to death or serious physical injury.
Symbol:
WARNING
Meaning: Dangerous situation Warns of a potentially dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements can lead to death or serious physical injury.
Symbol:
CAUTION
Meaning: Possibly dangerous situation Warns of a possibly dangerous situation in which failure to comply with safety requirements could cause damage to property or result in some kind of minor physical injury.
A-5
Symbols indicating application notes and useful information:
Symbol:
NOTE
Means that important information about the product or its handling is being given.
Symbol: Meaning: CE mark The CE mark enables the manufacturer to guarantee that the product complies with the requirements of the relevant EC directives (the declaration of conformity is available at http://www.hbm.com/support/dokumentation).
Symbol: Meaning: Component may be damaged by electrostatic discharge This means that the PCMCIA hard disk (optional) must be protected against static discharges by securing it in place with the fasteners provided (CP42 only).
A-6
Working safely Error messages must only be acknowledged when the cause of the error has been removed and no further danger exists. Conversions and modifications The amplifier system must not be modified from the design or safety engineering point of view except with our express agreement. Any modification shall exclude all liability on our part for any resulting damage. In particular, any repair or soldering work on motherboards is prohibited (this includes changing components other than EPROMs). When exchanging complete modules, use only original parts from HBM. Qualified personnel means persons entrusted with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the product who possess the appropriate qualifications for their function. This instrument must only to be installed and used by qualified personnel, strictly in accordance with the technical data and the safety requirements and regulations listed below. It is also essential to comply with the legal and safety requirements for the application concerned during use. The same applies to the use of accessories.
A-7
Safety requirements Before commissioning, find out whether the mains voltage and current type specified on the identification plate match the mains voltage and current type at the place of use, and whether the circuit being used is adequately protected. Insert the mains plug only into a socket with a protection switch (Protection Class I). When connecting electrical devices to low voltage: connect to separated extralow voltage (SELV) only (safety transformer in accordance with DINVDE 0551 / EN60742). Use only the mains cable supplied, which has been provided with a ferrite core. Before you open the device, make sure it is switched off; remove the mains plug from the socket. Never pull the mains plug from the socket by the mains cable. Do not operate the device, if the mains cable is damaged. If an amplifier channel is to be withdrawn, close off the plug-in unit with a blank plate. Built-in devices must only ever be operated whilst they are within the housing provided for them. The device complies with the safety requirements of DIN EN 61010-Part 1 (VDE 0411-Part 1); Protection Class I. To ensure adequate immunity from interference, use only Greenline shielded ducting (see HBM offprint Greenline shielding design, EMC-compliant measuring cable; G36.35.0) The port connections (v50V) must have an insulating strength of at least 350V(AC).
A-8
Introduction Notes on the documentation
Notes on the documentation
The total documentation for the MGCplus amplifier system covers the following publications: The Operating Manual explains how you can operate the device manually and use it to take measurements. With each system device delivered, CD-ROMs containing the following documentation are also supplied: Operation with computer or terminal contains the commands for programming and measuring with a computer or terminal MGCplus Assistant, documentation about the program for assigning parameters and driving the MGCplus measurement amplifier system. Catman Demo, which is a demo version of the data acquisition, display and analysis software from HBM.
Introduction Notes on the documentation
A-9
This manual contains all the information you need to operate the MGCplus. There are several guidelines available to you: The column header tells you which chapter or sub-section you are currently reading.
Example: Connections SG full bridges, induct. half bridges B-15
The page numbering is linked to capital letters which correspond to the chapter headings. Chapter D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32 contains explanations about the AB22A/AB32 display and control panel. All statements about the display and control panel refer to both variants (AB22A/AB32). For reasons of space, however, most of the illustrations only show the AB22A. Chapter I Menu structure gives you an overview of the selection and set-up menus on the display and control panel.
A-10
Introduction System description
System description
The MGCplus system is modular in construction. Depending on the enclosure variant concerned, up to 16 slots are available for one-channel and multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules. This means that up to 128 measuring points can be measured in one MGCplus. Each amplifier plug-in module operates in standalone mode through the internal CPU. Data conditioning, such as taring, filtering and measuring range adjustment, is carried out in digital form. The disadvantages of analogue conditioning, such as time and temperature related drift, errors due to component tolerances, limited flexibility and high circuit complexity, can no longer arise. The prerequisite for this, however, is analogue-digital conversion free of information loss. The digitally conditioned signal is fed to the internal high-speed bus. In the case of one-channel measurement modules, two analogue outputs (voltage or current) are available in addition to the digital measured values. A credit-card format standard internal PC collects the data with a total sampling rate of up to 300 000 values per second. All measurement signals can be captured in parallel, since each channel has its own A/D converter. No Sample & Hold or multiplexer is used in the MGCplus. This ensures continuous digital filtering and highest possible signal stability. Using interfaces like Ethernet or USB, data is sent to an external computer or PLC.
A-11
Digit remote contacts, limit switches
PC-Card (optional)
...
1 2 8
...
2400Hz 2400Hz 2400Hz
filtering, scaling, zero balancing, etc.
filtering scaling, zero balancing, etc.
CPU
CPU
and control panel
Communikation processor CPxx
CPU
8-channel module
CPU
Onechannel module Serial bus
MGCplus
Fig.3.1:
MGCplus block diagram
Synchronisation
Digital signal conditioning
Digital signal conditioning
...
...
...
Display
PC-Interface
Further MGCplus
Profibus
"10V
CAN
A-12
Fig.3.2:
On-board network 9V ... 58V
ON/Off Power pack Communication

Embedded PC with memory
MGCsplit block diagram

PC Card Ethernet USB RS 232 C Hard disk
Display Bus communication
Multi-channel module
Digital signal conditioning Filtering Scaling Zero balance
ML70B
Single-channel module
Dig. sign. Filter. Scal. Zero
"10V Remote contacts Limit value switches
Programmable module
"10V Digital I/O CAN RS 232 C/RS 485
Introduction MGCplus housing versions
A-13
MGCplus housing versions
The MGCplus system is supplied in various housing versions (dimensions in mm).
Desktop housing TG 009C (173x171x367)
Desktop housing TG 001C/002C (255x171x367)
Desktop housing TG 010B/003C/004C (458x171x367)
Rack frame 19 ER 003C/004C (482x133x375)
Desktop housing TG001C TG010C TG002C TG003C TG004C TG009C
Rack frame ER003C ER004C
Slots 6 6 (with AB32) 6 16 16 2
Supply voltage (V) 230 (115) 230 (115) 12/24 = 230 (115) 12/24 = 230 (115)
Weight, approx. (kg) TG/ER 6 8 6 7/6 7.5/6 5
A-14
Introduction MGCplus housing versions
All basic versions of the device consist of the following components: Display and control panel AB22A /AB32, AB12 (without link feature) Amplifier plug-in modules (ML10B, ML30B, ML50B, ML55B, etc.) Housing Connection boards (AP01i, AP02, etc.) Power pack Options: Final stage module (EM001) Relay module (RM001) CP22 (communications processor with Ethernet-on-board and USB-Interfaces) CP42 (communications processor with data storage option)
Introduction MGCplus device
A-15
Structure of the MGCplus device
Connection boards (AP01i, AP02, etc.)
Final stage modules Power pack

CPxx
Communications processor
AB22A display and control panel Amplifier plug-in modules (ML30B, ML50B etc.)
Fig.5.1:
Device structure with display and control panel AB22A
A-16
Introduction MGCplus device
Connection board (AP01i to AP18i)
Final stage modules Power pack

CPxx
Communications processor
AB32 display and control panel
Amplifier plug-in modules (ML30B, ML50B etc.)
Fig.5.2:
Device structure with display and control panel AB32
Introduction MGCplus structure
A-17
Insert communications processor CP22/CP42
Requirements for operation of the communications processor: The MGC/MGCplus system must not include any AB12 display and control panel. The MGC/MGCplus/MGCsplit system must not include any modules of type MCxx. Only modules of type MLxxB (with ML firmware or MC firmware) and MLxx (only with ML firmware) are permissible. The display and control panels (AB22A, ABX22A, AB32) operated with the CP22 in the system unit must use firmware P4.01 or higher. Any firmware upload has to be performed before installing the communication processor.
A-18
If you want to swap out an older type of communications processor for a CP22/CP42 communication processor, you have to remove two guide rails from the MGCplus housing.
Upper guide rail
Lower guide rail
Fig.6: Guide rails in the MGCplus housing
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Disconnect the MGCplus device from the mains power supply. Remove the upper and lower covers from the housing. Withdraw the existing communications processor from the housing. CP12 only: Remove the BL01 blank plate next to the power pack (see page A-19). Remove the upper and lower guide rails. Slide the new communications processor into the housing. Put the upper and lower covers back onto the housing.
A-19
CAUTION
Before swapping a CP12 communication processor for a CP22/CP42 you should also remove the blank plate next to the power pack, in order to prevent damage to any PCB components when sliding the processor into the housing.
Blank plate BL01
Power pack
CP 12
AB22A display and control panel
Fig.6.1:
Removing the BL01 blank plate (view from above)
A-20
Introduction MGCsplit
Modules in the MGCsplit system
The MGCsplit system is based on the components of the MGCplus measurement system and housed in robust enclosures (protection class IP 40 or IP 65). The system makes it possible to build up a decentralized measurement system from individual modules. Each enclosure has room for an amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates. The following module types are available, depending on the particular function required: D D Measurement modules with one MLxx amplifier module and max. two connector plates Processor modules with one communication processor
D Power pack module with power pack and CAN input The modules are networked together using split-line connection cable and optionally may also be networked with the MGCplus system via the AP20 connector plate.
Fig.7.1:
MGCsplit measuring amplifier system
Note
When the line length exceeds 10m or the total number of modules exceeds 8, we recommend the use of a Link terminating resistor (1MGCsplit Term) for linking the MGCsplit modules.
MGCplus with AB22A /AB32
A-21
7.1
Measurement module, enclosure 1SH400
This module has an enclosure which is open at the front and in which a conventional MGCplus MLxx amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates can be fitted. If you use one connector plate only, this must be positioned in the outermost slot on the right and the empty slot must be closed off with a blank plate.
Three communications LEDs Four module address LEDs Split-line in Split-line out
Amplifier module, e.g. ML801B Connector plate 2, e.g. AP409 Subchannels 5 to 8 Connector plate 1, e.g. AP409 Subchannels 1 to 4 Fig.7.2: Version IP40, typical configuration
A-22
7.2
Measurement module, enclosure 1SH650
This module is closed by a shared front panel. The MLxx amplifier module and a maximum of two connector plates are fitted securely in the enclosure. The protection class IP65 enclosure is designed for outside use. The amplifier module or connector plates can only be changed in the factory.
Three communications LEDs Four module address LEDs Split-line in Split-line out
Amplifier, e.g. ML801B Connection sockets (ODU) Channels 5 to 8 Connection sockets (ODU) Channels 1 to 4
Fig.7.3:
Version IP65, typical configuration
A-23
7.3
Processor modules 1SH400CP
The CP22 and CP42 communication processors in the 1SH400 enclosure handle the communication between modules. They have the usual PC interfaces (RS232, USB, Ethernet) and ensure rapid synchronization with other MGCplus systems. The CP42 communication processor can also accept a PC card which enables data to be recorded without a PC.
NOTE
The CP22 communication processor has to be mounted rightaligned and the middle (free) slot has to be covered by a dummy plate.
Interfaces
Three communications LEDs Connection for indicator PC card Split-line in Split-line out
Synchronization
Fig.7.4:
Enclosure 1SH400 with CP42 communication processor
A-24
7.4
LED display for modules
Rx/Tx For monitoring the communication bus. Green = OK Off = communication signal fault SYNC For monitoring the synchronization signal. Green = signal present Off = no signal present LINK For monitoring the measurement data bus. Green = OK Off = link signal fault If the measurement system consists of more than four modules, the LINK LED is darker due to the increased data load from all the modules. If a link signal fault is suspected, the modules should be tested individually. ERROR If a measurement module is removed while the system is operating, the series-connected module detects this and its ERROR LED flashes red at approx. 1 Hz. Once the system is restarted the error status is reset.
A-25
Display for other error situations (measurement modules only):

LED display Error + address LED1 Error + address LED2 Error + address LED4 Error + address LED8 Error Restart error No address received Faulty address signal More than 16 channels present
Restart errors can occur if the supply voltage is quickly turned off and on again. After switching off the supply voltage it is best to wait about 2 seconds before turning it on again. No address received is displayed if the cabling is faulty, e.g. if line in (IN) and line out (OUT) have become switched. To remedy this, reconnect the cabling correctly and restart the system. When more than 16 measurement modules are connected, the measurement module displays at address 16 the error More than 16 channels present and the following modules show No address received. These measurement modules are ignored by the communication processor.
A-26
ADDRESS (measurement modules only) Module address, binary display (address 16 = all LEDs off).
NOTE
The address is displayed in error-free measuring mode only. In the event of an error the address LEDs have a different meaning (see ERROR).
Address LED 1 2 4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
= LED on = LED off The module addresses result from the cabling of the measurement system. The measurement module which has its split-line input (IN) connected to the split-line output (OUT) on the processor module receives address 1. The next module, which is connected to the output (OUT) of module 1, receives address 2, and so on. This gives continuous address numbering without gaps. In the event that MGCsplit modules are incorporated into an MGCplus system via the AP20 connector plate, the first MGCsplit measurement module receives the address of the AP20 slot (e.g. with an AP20 in slots 3 and 4, the measurement module receives address 3).
A-27
7.5
Connecting to MGCplus systems
Split-line connecting cable can also be used to connect the 1SH400 and 1SH650 measurement modules to MGCplus systems. An AP20 connector plate is needed for this. A processor module is not necessary, since communication is carried out by the processor on the MGCplus system.
MGCplus system
Connector plate AP20
Connecting cable 1Kab265 1Kab2643
MGCsplit system
Fig.7.5:
MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system
MGCplus system requirements: D D CP22 or CP42 communication processor. Hardware version 1.31 (or higher) of the MGCplus measuring amplifier (older MLxx amplifiers can be retrofitted in the factory at Darmstadt).
A-28
Installing an AP20 connector plate The AP20 connector plate is installed in the MGCplus instrument directly alongside the existing connector plates. The remaining slots (to the right of the AP20 in Fig.7.6) must be kept free. The unoccupied channels in the MGCplus (up to channel 16) are available to the MGCsplit system. In the case of amplifier modules that do not need connector plates (e.g. the ML77B), the backing connector plate slot must be kept free just the same (see Fig.7.7).
MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 AP20 APxx APxx APxx APxx
MGCsplit Address 5
MGCsplit Address 6
CP22/ CP42
IN OUT Not in use

IN
Fig.7.6:
MGCsplit measurement module connected to an MGCplus system via an AP20 connector plate (top view)
MLxx MLxx MLxx MLxx
A-29
MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 AP20 APxx APxx APxx
MGCsplit Address 5
MGCsplit Address 6
CP22/ CP42
Not in use
IN OUT Not in use

IN
Fig.7.7:
AP20 next to an amplifier module without a connector plate (top view)
MLxx MLxx MLxx ML77B
A-30
Is the last MGCplus module (MLxx or APxx) is double-width (e.g. ML38B, AP03i, etc.), then a complete slot must be kept free ahead of the AP20 connector plate (see Fig.7.8 and Fig.7.9).
MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 APxx APxx APxx APxx AP20
MGCsplit Address 6
MGCsplit Address 7
CP22/ CP42
Not in use
Not in use
IN
OUT
IN
Fig.7.8:
Special case of an ML38B with an AP20 connector plate
MLxx MLxx MLxx
ML38B
A-31
MGCplus Addresses 1 to 4 AP03i APxx APxx APxx AP20
MGCsplit Address 7
MGCsplit Address 8
CP22/ CP42
Not in use Not in use
IN
OUT
IN
Fig.7.9:
Special case of a double-width connector plate next to an AP20 connector plate
MLxx MLxx MLxx MLxx
A-32
7.6
Enclosure dimensions
Mechanical linkage of the module enclosure

205.5 202.42 Raster 101.5 204.4
149.4
A-33
Dimensions in the case of lateral mounting
A-34
Dimensions in the case of rear mounting
Introduction Conditions on site
A-35
Conditions on site
CAUTION
D D D D D Protect desktop devices from moisture or atmospheric influences such as rain, snow etc. Ensure that the ventilation openings on the sides, the openings for the electric fan on the back of the device and the openings on the underside of the device are not covered up. Protect the device from direct sunlight. Comply with the maximum permitted ambient temperature specified for the system device in the technical data (chapter J). When installed in 19 fitted cupboards, due to the poor heat dissipation suitable steps must be taken to ensure that the maximum permissible ambient temperature is not exceeded (see page J-63). In all cases we recommend forced exhaust ventilation and in particularly critical cases, clearances above and below the rack frame. Permissible relative humidity at 31 5C is 80 % (non-condensing), reducing linearly to 50 % at 40 5C. The devices are classed as overvoltage category II, pollution grade 2 equipment.
D D
A-36
Introduction Maintenance and cleaning
Maintenance and cleaning
MGCplus system devices are maintenance free. Please note the following points when cleaning the housing:
CAUTION
Withdraw the mains plug from the socket before carrying out any cleaning. D D Clean the housing with a soft, slightly damp (not wet!) cloth. You should on no account use solvent, since it may damage the labelling on the front panel and the display field. When cleaning, ensure that no liquid gets into the device or connections.
B-1
Connecting
B-2
Connecting Mains and battery operation: desktop housing
B-3
1 1.1
Connection: desktop housing Mains connection
The NT010 power pack is designed for connection to 230 V (115 V) and for the maximum configuration of 16 channels. It adapts automatically to the 115 V/230 V mains supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary.
Chassis ground
The power pack is protected with an internal 3.15 A/ T micro-fuse.
CAUTION
The power pack fuse may be changed only by the manufacturers service personnel. Earthing switch The earthing switch, in the factory setting ( ), links zero operating voltage to the protection circuit. If external devices (e.g. transducers, computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to occur (hum-pickup), the earthing switch must be opened ( ).
Mains connection Earthing switch
B-4
1.2
Battery connection
Chassis ground
The NT011 power pack is designed for mainsindependent battery operation for a maximum of 16 channels. It adapts automatically to a 12 V/24 V DC supply voltage. The fan on the power pack is temperature-controlled and automatically cuts out if necessary.
Connections
To protect against electromagnetic interference, you must wrap the connection cable round the ferrite ring supplied (3 turns). Position the ferrite ring as close to the power pack as possible and make sure that the coils are parallel and close together.
Earthing switch
Supply voltage (+) 12 V/24 V DC ()
Ferrite ring Connection cable
Connect the device to the battery via the screw terminals on the back of the device.
Fuse
CAUTION
Be sure to make all connections with the correct polarity. Use cable with a wire cross section of 2.5 mm2 to 4 mm2.
B-5
Fuse Flat-pin fuse 25A F (Colour code colourless). The fuse also acts as a one-way fitting. Changing the fuse
CAUTION
Disconnect the device from the battery before changing the fuse. Voltage drop If the battery voltage drops below 8.5 V (for instance battery low, connection cable too long), the MGCplus is in reset status and is not ready to take measurements (display and LEDs light up). If the voltage returns to more than 10.8 V you may take measurements again. If the battery voltage drops below 7.5 V, the MGCplus switches off (display and LEDs dark) and is only ready for service again if battery voltage returns to 10.8 V. Earthing switch ), links zero operating voltage to the protection circuit. If external deThe earthing switch, in the factory setting ( vices (e.g. transducers, computers) already make this link, and this causes ground circuits to occur (hum-pickup), the earthing switch must be opened ( ).
B-6
1.3
Synchronization
CP42 RS 232 CARDBUS
Synchronizing a CP22/CP42 Connected devices are automatically detected and synchronized by dedicated SYNC sockets. The status (master/slave) is displayed by means of a colorcoded LED.
LED Green Yellow Status Master Synchronized slave Unsynchronized slave
USB DEVICE
Red
USB HOST
LED
ETHERNET
YE SLAVE RD ERROR GN MASTER
IN SYNC CTRL I/O OUT 24V 1 2 GND 1 2 OUT IN
Synchronization sockets CP42
B-7
CP22 RS 232 CTRL I/O IN OUT 24Vext GNDext
USB SLAVE SYNCRON. IN
LED
USB MASTER
ETHERNET
OUT SYNCRON.
Synchronization sockets CP22
B-8
Connecting ABX22A
Connecting the ABX22A
Blank plate BL12A
Connect the male connector for the mobile ABX22A display and control unit to the female connector on blank plate BL12A. Field upgrade: If you wish to replace an existing AB22A with a mobile ABX22A as an upgrade, please take note of the following points: Replace the AB22A with a blank plate BL12A. Unscrew the cover from the housing Check the position of the sliding switch and change it if necessary (see figure below).
Male connector for the ABX22A: 3-3312.0121, 8-pin, Series 423 9956711508 Cable extension female connector: 3-3312.0120, 8-pin, Series 432 9956721508
Connecting ABX22A
B-9
Plan de positionnement des commutateurs dinterface (botier ouvert, vue de dessus) :
Display and control unit
Switch position seen from above
RS485
TTL
position 1
S2 X
Botier
Cble nappe
AB22A position 1 S1
Bloc dalimentation secteur
S3 Commutateur CP S2 S1
position 2 ABX22A position 2
S2 X
Commutateur dinterfaces
S1
NOTE
If a CP... Communication Processor was subsequently installed, the S3 CPswitch must be changed over!
Without CP... seen from above With CP... seen from above
CP yes S3 no S3
CP yes no
B-10
Connecting ABX22A
NOTE
LOG OFF EXTERNAL DISPLAY
Log off
Cancel
When operating devices without a communications processor but with an ML77B Profibus module, you must log off the ABX22A before removing the connector cable. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press function key with . . to return to set-up mode. .
3. Select Log off from the pull-up menu and confirm
4. Select the Log off button and confirm with
5. When the message Now you can disconnect the ABX22A! is displayed, you can remove the connector cable.
Connecting Shielding design
B-11
Shielding design
Until now:
gr 12 1*
* Pin assignment varies according to the connection board (see table)
So far, the customary HBM shielding connection has used a male connector to connect the shield. This solution provides only limited EMC protection and should no longer be used.
AP01i/13i/14/17 Earth pin 1 AP03i E AP07/1 YE
GREENLINE
wh bk rd bl gn gr ye
New Greenline shielding design: HBM has developed the Greenline shielding design as an effective means of improving EMC protection against electromagnetic interference. The cable shielding is formed in such a way that the whole of the measurement chain is completely enclosed in a Faraday cage.
NOTE
In the case of connection boards fitted with a terminal connector (AP07/1), connect the cable shielding to the eyelet on the connection board.
B-12
Connecting Transducers
Connecting transducers
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage ()

2
Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal ()

4
When using double-width connection boards (AP03i) only slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11i can be occupied by an amplifier. This also applies when using an AP01i connection board in conjunction with an AP02. IMPORTANT: Transducer with four-wire connection
1 3
Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+)
Feedback bridges
Sensor circuit ()
If you are connecting a transducer with 4-wire cable, you must connect the sensor circuit to the appropriate bridge excitation circuit in the transducer male connector (sensor circuit () to excitation voltage () and sensor circuit (+) to excitation voltage (+))*). Any cable extension must only ever be carried out in six-wire connection.
*)
For cable lengths >50 m, one resistor with half the bridge resistance value (BR/2) must be wired into the transducer in place of each feedback bridge. If the transducers are calibrated in six-wire connection, the resistors must be wired directly into the sensor circuit.
B-13
4.1
Connecting separate TEDS modules
Amplifier:
All MLxxB and ML460
AP01i AP13i AP455i

1 9
15
(+)
Operating voltage zero
8 6 15
Geh.
()
Cable shielding
TEDS TEDS Data
4 9
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey
B-14
4.2
Strain gage full bridges, inductive full bridges
Amplifier:
Amplifier:
SG full bridge ML30B, ML55B, ML10B3), ML38B4) Ind. full bridges ML50B, ML55B
AP01i AP13i AP14 AP455i

1 9
AP03i
AP11i AP455iS6
A B
F G E D
15
1 2 3
6 5 4
WH BK
2
BL RD
1 3
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
8 5 6 15
Case
A B C D
Case
1 2 3 4
Case
YE GN GR
13 12
F G
5 6
1) 2) 3) 4)
see page B-11 SG full bridges only Full bridge and Lo must be set up under bridge type only use ML38B in connection with AP01i and AP03i
B-15
4.3
SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i Sub-channel Sub-channel

1 14
Sub-channel 3/7
Sub-channel 4/8
1/5 Sub-channel 1...4

WH
2/6
13
25
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
2 1 3 15
Case
5 4 6 18
Case
8 7 9 21
Case
11 10 12 24
Case
BK
2
BL RD
14 1 3 4
YE GN GR
Sub-channel 5...8
13 25
16 14
19 17
22 20
25 23
1)
see also page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey
B-16
4.4
Strain gage half bridges, inductive half bridges
Amplifier:
SG half bridges ML30B2), ML55B, ML10B3) Ind. half bridges ML50B, ML51, ML55B
AP01i AP13i AP14 AP455i

1 9
AP03i
AP11i AP455iS6
Amplifier:
A B
F G E D
15
1 2 3
6 5 4
WH BK
2
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+)
8 5 6
A B C
1 2 3
BL
1 3
YE GN GR
Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
Case
Case
Case
13 12
F G
5 6
1) 2) 3)
see page B-11 only in conjunction with AP14 Half bridge and Lo must be set up under bridge type
Wire colours: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray
B-17
4.5
LVDT-Transducer
Amplifier: ML455
AP455i AP455iS6
1 2 3
6 5 4
LVDT-Transducer
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () Cable shield 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
8 5 6 15
1 2 3
Case case
13 12
5 6
B-18
4.6
SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i Subchannel Subchannel

14
Subchannel Subchannel 3/7 4/8
1/5 Subchannel 1...4
2/6
13
25 2
RD WH/RD WH/GN
Sensor circuit () Excitation voltage () Measuring signal (+) Cable shielding
14 1 2
Case
17 4 5
Case
20 7 8
Case
23 10 11
Case
14
Subchannel 4 5...8
13 25 3
GN WH/BR BN
Measuring signal (); AP815ii only Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+)
15 3 16
18 6 19
21 9 22
24 12 25
1)
see page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
B-19
4.7 4.7.1
Connecting a single strain gage Compensating resistor external
Amplifier: ML55B, ML10B
AP01i AP13i AP455i

1 9
AP03i
AP11i
A B
F G E D
15
1 2 3
6 5 4
WH BK
2
8 5 6
A B C
1 2 3
BL
YE
3
Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
Case
Case
Case
GN GR
13 12
F G
5 6
1)
see page B-11
R - compensating resistor Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey
B-20
4.7.2
Compensating resistor external with AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP810/AP815i Subchannel Subchannel

14
Subchannel Subchannel 3/7 4/8
1/5 1...4
2/6
Subchannel
25 2
RD WH/RD WH/GN
13
Sensor circuit () Excitation voltage () Measuring signal (+) Cable shielding
14 1 2
Case
17 4 5
Case
20 7 8
Case
23 10 11
Case
14
Subchannel 4 5...8
13 25 3
GN WH/BR BN
Measuring signal (); AP815ii only Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+)
15 3 16
18 6 19
21 9 22
24 12 25
1)
see page B-11
Wire colours: WH= white; BL= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
B-21
4.7.3
Single strain gage with AP14
Amplifier: ML30B, ML55B, ML10B
AP14
15
Sensor circuit () Excitation voltage ()
12 5
SG
SG
Case
Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+)
15 8
Three-wire connection* Four-wire connection*

* Must be set up under bridge type
B-22
4.7.4
Single strain gage with AP814Bi
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP814Bi
14
Sub-channels 1 Sub-channel 1...8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13
25
Excitation voltage ()
5 2
15
18
5 8
21
11
24
SG
Cable shielding 1) Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+)
Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case
15 14 8 1
16 3
17 4
19 6
15 20 8 7
22 9
23 10
25 12
Three-wire connection
1)
see also page B-11
B-23
4.7.5
Single strain gage with AP815i
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP815i Subchannel
1 14
Subchannel Subchannel Subchannel 2/6 3/7 4/8
1/5 Subchannel 1...4
13
25
2 2
WH/RD RD
Excitation voltage () Sensor circuit ()
1 14
4 17
7 20
10 23
14
S.G. Subchannel 5...8

13 25
Cable shield
Case
Case
Case
Case
1 4
WH/GN GN
Measuring signal (+) Excitation voltage (+)
2 15
5 18
8 21
11 24
1)
see page B-11
B-24
4.7.6
SG systems and rosettes on AP815i
Amplifier:
AP815i
ML801B
sub-channel 1
2
Excitation voltage () Sensor circuit () Cable shielding Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (+)
1 14
sub-channel 2/6 sub-channel
2
14
SG sub-channel 5 1...4
13 25
SG 4/8
SG 3/7
SG 2/6
SG 1
Case
3/7 sub-channel 4/8 5 18 8 21 11 24 2 15 sub-channel 5
1 4
2 15
14
sub-channel 5...8
13 25
You can operate a maximum of eight 120 W SGs on a 5 V feed. Make sure that sensor probe 2 on the SG system is as close as possible to the single strain gages and that the gaps between the single strain gages are small.
B-25
If the gaps between the single strain gages cannot be kept small (for example two 90 rosettes at different places), they should be connected as follows:
Amplifier:
AP815i
ML801B
2 2
sub-channel 1 Excitation voltage () Sensor circuit () Cable shielding Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (+) 1 14 sub-channel 2
14
SG 2 1...4
SG 1
Case
sub-channel
1 4
25
2 15 5 18
13
14
sub-channel 5...8
13 25
sub-channel 5
2 2
Excitation voltage () Sensor circuit () Cable shielding Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage (+)
1 14
sub-channel 6
SG 4
SG 3
Geh.
1 4
2 15 5 18
B-26
4.8 4.8.1
Torque flange T10FSF1, T10FSU2 Torque measurement
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP17
15
Male connector 1 Md
BK Supply voltage (0V) BL Supply voltage (18V ... 30V) Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+) Measurement signal torque, frequency output () Cable shielding GN GR
1)
5 6 12 13
Case
RD 4 1 WH YE
7/56
Calibration signal trigger (approx. 5V) Ground
14 8
1)
see page B-11 Connection cable KT10F Option 5, Code V5, V6, W1, W2.
For connection of version T10FKF1 see chapter 4.9
B-27
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 6 5
Male connector1 Md 2 3 RD 4 1 7/5 6 GN GR Ground WH YE Measurement signal torque, frequency output (+) Measurement signal torque, frequency output () Cable shielding 1)
1 2
Case
10
1)
see page B-11
For connection of version T10FKF1 see chapter 4.9
B-28
AP460i Pin assignment
LEMO) connector female

(Top view)
Pin 1 2 3 4
Function Frequency signal 1, Input a Frequency signal 1, Input b Frequency signal 2, Input a Frequency signal 2, Input b Zero index, Input a Zero index, Input b Transducer supply (0 V, 5 V, 8 V or 16 V, depending on jumper position, see page B-40) Transducer identification (Dallas protocol) Supply mass Signal mass
7 8 9 1 2
6 5 10 4 3
5 6 7 8 9 10
Connection: Symmetrical input signal (RS 422): Asymmetrical input signal, bipolar: Asymmetrical input signal, unipolar: Input a / Input b Input a (Signal mass at Input b) Input a (Signal mass at Pin 10, Input b must stay open)
B-29
4.8.2
Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals)
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP17
15
Male connector 2 n
BK and BL Ground RD Measurement signal, rotation speed 0 (+) Measurement signal, rotation speed 0 () Measurement signal, rotation speed 90 () Cable shielding
1)
8 12 13 14
Case
WH 6 7 GN
GR
Measurement signal, rotation speed 90 (+)
15
1)
see page B-11 Connection cable KT10F Option 5, Code W1, W2.
For connection of version T10FKF1 see chapter 4.9.
B-30
Amplifier:
ML460i
AP460i
7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 6 5
Male connector 2 n
YE RD
Ground Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0 (+) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0 () Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90 () Cable shielding 1)
10 1 2 4
Case
WH 6 7 GN
GR
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90 (+)
1)
see page B-11
B-31
4.8.3
Rotation speed measurement (symmetrical signals) with reference signal
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP17
15
Male connector 2 n
YE Ground RD Measurement signal, rotation speed 0 (+) Measurement signal, rotation speed 0 () Measurement signal, rotation speed 90 () Cable shielding BL BK
1)
8 12 13 14
Case.
WH 6 7 GN
3 4
Reference signal (+) Reference signal () Measurement signal, rotation speed 90 (+)
2 3 15 11
GR
5V (out)
1)
see page B-11
Connection cable KT10FS option 6, Code W5, W6
Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey
B-32
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 6 5
Male connector 2 n
YE RD
Ground Measurement signal, rotation speedl, 0 (+) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 0 () Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90 () Cable shielding 1)
10 1 2 4
Case
WH 6 7 GN
3 4
2 BL BK
Reference signal (+) Reference signal () Measurement signal, rotation speed, 90 (+)
5 6 3
GR
1)
see page B-11
Wire colors: YE= yellow; RD= red; WH= white; GN= green; BL= blue; BK= black; GR= grey
B-33
4.9 4.9.1
Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1) Torque measurement (square-wave excitation voltage)
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP07 /1 (MD)
A B C G
F E D
with T34FN only
GN YE PK Transducer shaft Md WH
WH BK BL RD YE
Zero operating voltage Supply voltage preamplifier (15V) Supply voltage preamplifier (+15V) Measurement signal, torque, 12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz Cable shielding 1) Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 54V/81V Rotor square-wave excitation voltage 0V
A B C D
Case
BN GR
GN GR
F G
1)
see page B-11
Connection cable Kab 139A with male MS connector
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; PK= pink; BN= brown
For connection of version T10FSF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8
B-34
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7 8 9 10 1 2
with T34FN only
6 5 4 3
GN
WH
Zero operating voltage
10
Transducer shaft Md
WH
RD YE
Measurement signal, torque, 12V (5...30V) peak, 5...15kHz

Cable shielding 1)
1
Case
1)
see page B-11
For connection of version T10FSF1/SU2 see chapter 4.8
B-35
4.9.2
Rotation speed measurement (asymmetrical signals)
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i AP07/1(N)
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
with T34FN only
WH
WH
Trans ducer shaft n
BK
RD YE
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak-to-peak (90o out-ofphase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shielding 1) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak-to-peak
15
Case
D
Case
4
Case
BL
GR
12
1)
see page B-11
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray
B-36
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 6 5
with T34FN only
WH
WH
10
Trans ducer shaft n
BK
RD YE
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peaktopeak (90o outof-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shielding 1)
3
Case
BL
GR
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peaktopeak
1)
see page B-11
B-37
4.10 4.10.1
Torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WA-S3, T5, TB1A) Torque measurement (slip ring or direct cable connection)
Amplifier:
ML30B, ML55B, ML10B
AP01i AP13i AP142) AP455i

1 9
AP03i
AP11i
A B
F G E D
15
1 2 3
6 5 4
WH BK
2
BL RD
1 3
YE
Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+)
8 5 6 15
Case
A B C D
Case
1 2 3 4
Cas e
13 12
F G
5 6
Feedback bridges for transducers in four-wire connection * see page B-11 SG full bridge only *) For transducers in six-wire connection: see connection diagram Page B-14
2) 1)
Sensor circuit ()
B-38
4.10.2
Rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement (T4WA-S3)
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
AP17
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
15
BK RD
Zero operating voltage Supply voltage +5V Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peak-to-peak 1) (90o out-of-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shield 2) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak-to-peak
8 13
A F
1 5
8 11 15
Case
Transducer shaft n
GR YE
15
Case
D
Case
4
Case
GN
12
12
1) 2)
for AP17 nominal voltage 5V (3...20V) see page B-11
B-39
Amplifier:
ML460
AP460i
8 7 6 5 9 1 2 3 10 4
Attention: You can connect a maximum of 3 Transducer shafts T4WAS3 to each MGCplus device.
BK
Zero operating voltage Jumper
9 10 7
RD
Supply voltage +5V 1) Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5...30V) peaktopeak (90o out-of-phase for angle of rotation detection) Cable shielding 2)
Transducer shaft n
GR YE
3
Case
GN
Measurement signal, rotation speed, 25V (5 ...30V) peak to peak
1) 2)
Change jumper on 5V, see page B-40 see page B-11
B-40
Jumper (Factory setting 0 V)
Connection board AP460i (Side view) Supply voltage +16 V No function (only for special versions) No function (only for special versions) Supply voltage +8 V Supply voltage +5 V
B-41
4.10.3
Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers
Amplifier:
ML460i
AP460i
8 9 1 2 3 10 4 7 6 5
Measurement signal, rotation speed (+)
1 1 kW 5 kW
Umax = 30 V
5V
Measurement signal, rotation speed ()
Inductive rotation speed measuring device (TR coil)
Please refer to the setup instructions for TR coils on page E-38.
B-42
4.11
Thermocouples
Amplifier:
ML01B
AP09
AP409
AP809 +
+ Extension wire Thermocouple 1 2 Connect shield here
+
Cable shield
1
Case Cas e
Case
Case
Extension wire
Type
1 (+)
2 ()
J K T S
Iron Nickel-chrome Copper Rhodium-platinum
Cupro-nickel Nickel Cupro-nickel Platinum
B-43
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP4091)
AP809 +
Miniature thermo-connector, uncompensated
+ Extension wire Thermocouple
()
(+)
Extension wire
Miniature thermo-connector (For compatible type see table)
Type
(+)
()
J K T S
Iron Cupro-nickel Nickel-chrome Nickel Copper Cupro-nickel Rhodium-platinum Platinum
1)
Maximum common-mode voltage about earth "50V; channels 1 to 4 electrically isolated from each other and system.
B-44
4.12
DC voltage sources
Amplifier:
ML01B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP09
AP11i
Maximum input voltage relative to earth ="12 V
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
1 2
(+)
Zero operating voltage3)
8 6 15
Case
A C D
Case
1
2)
1 3 4
Case
()
Cable shield 1)
2
Case
1) see page B-11 Connect the negative pole of the voltage source to one of the pins 22...25 on the 25-pin female connector Bu2 (earth pin) (in the case of the AP13i, only pin 25 can be used) 3) In the case of a potential-free DC voltage source, you must connect pin 15 to pin 6.
2)
B-45
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP801
AP801S6
Maximum input voltage relative to earth = "50 V
3 4
2 1
(+)
Case
(+) U ()
Supply voltage 8 V/16 V*) Supply voltage 0 V
1 2 3 4
Case
()
*)
Changeover supply voltage see page B-46
B-46
Supply voltage +16 V No function (for special versions only) Jumper No function (for special versions only) Supply voltage +8 V
Connection board AP801S6 (side view)
B-47
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP401 Sight of coupler socket 4x (wiring side)
2 3
1 4
(+)
Case.
Pin assignment 1 2 3 4 + In not in use not in use In
()
B-48
4.13
DC power source
Amplifier:
ML01B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
Maximum input voltage relative to earth = 12 V
15
() I (+)
5
shielding 1)
Case
B
Case
2
Case
Cable
1)
see page B-11
B-49
4.14
Resistors, Pt10, 100, 1000
Amplifier:
ML35B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
Three-wire connection
Four-wire connection
Excitation Sensor circuit *
5 12
B G
2 6
R
Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit Excitation
Case Case Case
13 6
F C
5 3
When connecting a two-wire sensor, wire bridges must be soldered into the male connector (between the sensor circuit and the excitation voltage) 1) see page B-11
B-50
Amplifier:
ML801B
AP835
1 2
4 3
Excitation Sensor circuit
1 2
R
Cable shielding Sensor circuit Excitation
Case
3 4
Pt100 with four wire circuit only
B-51
4.15
Frequency measurement without a direction of rotation signal
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP01i AP13i AP17

1 9
AP03i
AP11i
A B
F G E D
15
1 2 3
6 5 4
Frequency generator / Pulse generator
Cable shielding 1)
Case
Case
Case
Rotation speed/pulse signal 1 (frequency)
12
1)
see page B-11
Case = housing
In this operating mode, deactivate f2 signal evaluation (default: OFF), see page E-44.
B-52
4.16
Frequency measurement with direction of rotation signal
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
8
Case
A
Case
1
Case
Cable shielding 1) Frequency generator / Impulse generator Speed/Impulse signal 1 (Frequency f1)
12 15
G D
6 4
Rotation speed/pulse signal 1 (frequency f2)
1)
see page B-11
Case = Housing
*)
F2 signal evaluation has been deactivated by default. For measurements with signal of direction, you must activate the f2 signal, see page E-44.
B-53
4.17
Impulse counting
Amplifer:
ML60B
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
AP460i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
f2
15 12 6 5
D G C B
4 6 3 2
3 1 5
Industrial pulse generator Zero index Transducer error
f1
B-54
Amplifier:
ML60B
AP17 AP460i
15
Zero index + Zero index f1+ Industrial pulse generator f1 f2 f2+ Transducer error
2 3 12 13 14 15
5 6 1 2 4 3
B-55
4.18
Active and passive piezoelectric transducers
Passive piezoelectric transducer
Current-fed piezoelectric transducer
Amplifier:
ML10B, ML01B with AP08
AP08
Amplifier:
ML10B, ML01B with AP18i/AP418i
AP18i
AP418 i
Adjustment potentiometer for current feed Shield Piezoelectric transducer with preamplifier (with T-ID/ TEDS for AP418i) Shield
Piezoelectric transducer
Input *
Input *
Use special coaxial cable see page E-66
Advice for connection boards AP08, AP18i, AP418i: If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms or if the transducer connection cable is longer than 30 m, then this cable must be protected against high voltage with an additional, separately grounded shield. This can be achieved laying the cable in a metallic pipe or by using double shielded cables, where the external shield near by the connection board must be grounded (connect to ground or ground wire). For this purpose HBM recommend to use Triaxial cables.
B-56
4.19
Piezoresistive transducers
Amplifier: ML10B2)
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15
Measurement signal (+)

2
8 5 6 15
Case
A B C D
Case
1 2 3 4
Case
Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+)

4 3
Measurement signal () Cable shielding 1) Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
13 12
F G
5 6
1)
see page B-11
B-57
4.20
Potentiometric transducers (singlechannel)
Amplifier: ML10B2)
AP01i AP13i
AP03i
AP11i
9
A B F G E D 1 2 3 6 5 4
15

1
8 5 6
A B C
1 2 3
Cable shielding 1)
3
Case
Case
Case
Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
13 12
F G
5 6
1) 2)
see page B-11 You will need to set up and Hi under bridge type
B-58
4.21
Potentiometric transducers (Multichannel)
Amplifier: ML801B
AP836 Subchannels 1/5

1 14
2/6
3/7
4/8
Subchannel 1...4
25 2
Measuring signal (+) Excitation voltage ()
2 1 3
5 4 6
8 7 9
11 10 12
13
Excitation voltage (+)
Cable shield 1)
3
Case
Case
Case
Case
Subchannel 5...8
Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
16 14
19 17
22 20
25 23
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= gray; BN= brown
B-59
4.22
Connection via distributor board VT814i
SingleS.G.; 3wire connection with AP814

1Kab1563
2
SingleS.G.; 3wire connection with AP814Bi

1Kab1563
2
RJ45 socket
RJ45 socket
WH/GN Excitation voltage ()
WH/GN Excitation voltage (+)
S.G.
1
S.G. RD Measuring signal (+) Cable shield WH/RD Excitation voltage (+) 2
Case
RD
Measuring signal Cable shield
2
Case
WH/RD Excitation voltage ()
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
Connection diagram
Measuring point
S.G. 1 1Kab1563 RJ45 1 D-Sub25 S.G. 2 1Kab1563 2 1Kab2633 D-Sub25 1AP814Bi
Distributor board VT814
Connection board AP814Bi
S.G. 8 1Kab1563 8
A detailed connection diagram has been supplied with the distributor board.
B-60
4.23
Connection via distributor board VT810/815i
SingleS.G.; 4wire connection 1Kab1563

2 2 WH/RD RD Excitation voltage () Sensor circuit ()
S.G. half bridge

RJ45 socket
1Kab1563
RD
2
RJ45 socket
1 2
1
Sensor circuit () Excitation voltage () Measuring signal (+) Cable shield
2 1 3
Case
WH/RD WH/GN
S.G.
Cable shield 1 4 WH/GN GN Measuring signal (+) Excitation voltage (+)
Case 4
GN
3
Measuring signal (); only AP815i Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+)
6 7 8
3 6
WH/BN BN
S.G. full bridge 1Kab1563

WH/GN RD
2
RJ45 socket
Measuring signal (+) Sensor circuit () Excitation voltage () Measuring signal () Excitation voltage (+) Sensor circuit (+) Cable shield
3 2 1 6 7 8
Case
WH/RD GN
4 3
WH/BN BN
Wire colors: WH= white; BK= black; BL= blue; RD= red; YE= yellow; GN= green; GR= grey; BN= brown
B-61
Connection diagram
Measuring point
S.G. 1
Distributor board VT810/815i
Connection board AP810/815i

D-Sub25
1Kab1563
RJ45 1 D-Sub25 1Kab2633
S.G. 2 1Kab1563 2
D-Sub25 1Kab2633 1AP810 1AP815i S.G. 8 1Kab1563 8
B-62
Connecting MGCsplit
5 5.1
Connecting the MGCsplit modules Split-line-cable
CAUTION
Only original split-line connecting cable that has been made up and tested by HBM must be used for cabling MGCsplit systems. If other cable is used it will be impossible to guarantee error-free operation and we accept no responsibility for any resulting loss or damage.
Connecting MGCsplit
B-63
5.2
Power supply units NT650/NT651
1NT650
ATTENTION
The power supply units have fine-wire fuses. The fuses may only be replaced by the manufacturers service personnel. Connecting the power supply The power supply units NT650/NT651 supply the MGCsplit-modules with a direct voltage of 28 V. The input voltage range is 10 V ... 50 V (DC). The power supply units are not potentially isolated. The power supply unit NT650 is specially designed for test drives and can bridge voltage interruptions of up to 10 seconds 15 minutes after being switched on (if 10 measurement modules are connected). The buffer capacitors are automatically recharged as long as the power supply unit is switched on. Use a 4-wire cable for the supply line with a wire cross-section of 0.5 mm2. Always connect all 4 wires. Avoid high contact resistances (e.g. due to corroded plug connectors)! Voltage supply (device plug POWER IN)
Pin Function Input voltage (1050V DC) Input voltage (1050V DC) Input voltage (0V DC) Input voltage (0V DC) 1 2 3 4
Voltage supply
Matching plug (view of connection side)
4 3
1 2
Device plug: G82BFCT04MPH00000 Recommended cable jack: S32BFCT04LPH06000 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm)
B-64
Connecting MGCsplit
1NT650
You can connect a maximum of 10 modules (1x SH400CP and 9x SH400 or SH650) or, if using a ABX22 display- and control panel, a maximum of 9 modules. If more MGCsplit-modules (up to 1x SH400CP, 16x SH400 or SH650 and 1x ABX22) are to be operated, you will need an additional power supply unit. Both power supply units should in this case be arranged directly behind one another.
Input
Connect the MGCsplit measuring system to the sockets SPLITLINE IN and SPLITLINE OUT. Only use the Split Line cable from HBM. You can connect the power supply unit at any point in the measuring system. Just interrupt the SPLITLINE and connect the power supply unit in between.
Connection at the start of the system (before the SH400CP): Advantage: if there is a power failure, the communication processor CPxx receives a warning signal from the NT650 if the energy only suffices for another ca. 5 seconds. It can therefore finish the measurement in a defined manner. Connection in the middle (e.g. between two SH650 measurement modules): Advantage: Good power distribution (less losses in the supply lines).
Output
Connecting MGCsplit
B-65
Split-Line-connections
1
Pin 1 2 3 4
Function Output voltage (28V DC) for MGCsplit supply Output voltage (28V DC) for MGCsplit supply Output voltage (0V DC) for MGCsplit supply Output voltage (0V DC) for MGCsplit supply *) *) *) *) *) *) *) *) Power Down Signal at CP module (NT650 only) Earth potential MGCsplit *) *)
16
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
*)
Signal at these pins are looped through from SPLITLINE IN to SPLITLINE OUT.
Device connector: G82B0CT16QF000000 Recommended cable connector:S32B0CT16MPFG07500 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 7 mm ... 7.5 mm)
B-66
Connecting MGCsplit
1NT650
CAN-connections
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
(**)
Function CAN signal (Low) CAN earth Input for ext. CAN supply voltage (**) CAN signal (High) Digital input for remote control of NT650/NT651 Ground reference of digital input NT_ON
CANinput
Currently not required
Device connector: G82BACT06QPH000000 Recommended cable connector:S32BACT06MPH06000 (suitable for crimp mounting and cable diameter 5.5 mm ... 6 mm) With pin 5 you can switch the power supply unit on or off remotely. The mains switch must be in the position REMOTE. A change in the level from over 3V to under 1V or vice versa causes switching, either from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. The CAN bus is connected to pins 1 and 4, the earth may also be required. A CAN terminating resistor is not present in the power supply unit, if necessary you must add one externally. Switching on and off is implemented with two predefined messages (see Page B-67). The galvanically isolated digital input NT_ON is related to GNDM. GNDM can if necessary be connected with pin 6 (0V_IN).
1 6 2 3
Connecting MGCsplit
B-67
Switch settings
Switch setting ON OFF REMOTE Significance (with connected supply) The power supply unit is switched on, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC. (*) The power supply unit is switched off, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are not supplied. (*) a) Directly after switching from switch position OFF or after deactivation via CAN or digital input: The power supply unit is switched off, green LED flashes every 2s, connected MGCsplit-measuring system is only supplied when it is activated via the CAN or digital input. b) After activation via CAN or digital input: The power supply unit is switched on, green LED lights up, connected MGCsplit measuring systems are supplied with 28 V DC. (*)
(*) NT650 only: The buffer capacitors are automatically recharged when necessary (additional power consumption up to ca. 8W).
Manual on/off switching Turn the POWER switch to the ON or OFF position. Remote on/off switching In the switch position REMOTE, you can switch the power supply unit on/off via the CAN bus. Standard CAN is supported as per ISO11898 (Transceiver PCA82C251). A switch on and switch off message are defined. CAN-message for switching on/off:
CAN-parameter Baud Rate ID DLC Data switch on message Data switch off message Significance 250 kBit/s 0x83 2 0x79, 0x78 0x79, 0x70 MGCplus with AB22A/AB32
B-68
Connecting MGCsplit
Ensure that a terminating resistor (120 Ohm) is present on both ends of the CAN bus. The listed CAN parameters are preset but can be adapted by HBM on request. Remote control via digital input In the switch position REMOTE, the power supply unit can be switched on/off via a galvanically isolated digital input. Switching on/off is flank controlled, i.e. switching occurs when a flank is detected, either from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. A flank is detected when the actual level of the signal NT_ON changes from < 1V to > 3V (rising flank) or from > 3V to < 1V (falling flank). Remote control via CAN and digital input Both variants can be combined, e.g. switching on via CAN switch on message, switching off with rising or falling flank at the digital input. Bridging of voltage failures (NT650 only): The power supply unit NT650 is equipped with so-called buffer capacitors which are fully loaded within 15 minutes of the supply voltage being connected. If the power fails (e.g. during the vehicle starting procedure), the power supply unit is supplied by these capacitors. A connected MGCsplit system with maximum modules can be supplied for at least 10 seconds, correspondingly longer if less modules are connected. If a CP module is directly connected to the Split Line output and the capacitor feed is active, then the CP module will receive a warning signal (PDWN_CP based on GNDD) ca. 5 seconds before the buffer energy is exhausted and can therefore end a current measurement data recording in a defined manner.
Connecting MGCsplit
B-69
Once the input voltage is again available, discharged buffer capacitors are recharged, regardless of the NT650 switch position. Recharging can take up to 15 minutes if the buffer capacitors are fully discharged. A drop in capacitor voltage through self-discharge is also detected and compensated for by cyclical recharging. However, this requires that the NT650 is continually supplied with voltage. In order to achieve correct switching from external supply to capacitor supply, the supply lines must be as short and as low impedance as possible. Too many or poor plug connections can also affect the bridging function due to transition impedance. This must be taken into account when using numerous modules and low supply voltages. Operating states and errors, LED displays: Two LEDs are located on the front panel, these can display various operating states and errors.
B-70
Connecting MGCsplit
1NT650
Operating and error status display via status LEDs:

POWER STATUS (green LED) Operating states ON OFF OFF OFF Switch setting: ON or REMOTE, NT65x ON, normal operation, no error a) NT65x not supplied b) Switch position OFF, NT65x OFF, normal operation, no error Switch position REMOTE, NT65x OFF, normal operation, no error ERROR STATUS (Red LED) Significance
Flashes every 2s
OFF
Green LED Red LED
Error states ON Flashes once per second NT650 only: Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT650 ON, supply voltage failure, power supply unit operation via buffer capacitors. Error rectification: Restore correct supply. NT650 only: Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT650 ON, voltage supply failure, power supply unit operation via buffer capacitors which are already discharged to ca. 15 20% of their initial energy level. Error rectification: Restore correct supply. a) Switch position ON or REMOTE, active NT65x is switched off due to excess temperature. Error rectification: Switch to OFF, check load and allow device to cool, switch NT65x back on. b) Switch position ON or REMOTE, NT65x switched off due to overload (e.g. short circuit). Error rectification: Switch to OFF, rectify overload, switch NT65x back on.
ON
Flashes twice per second
OFF
ON
Connecting MGCsplit
B-71
Schematic circuit diagram of battery cable RL RK UBat RL RL Iin = Pin Umin NT650 SH400CP
Umin Pin
RK
RL Cable
Terminal
Equation for minimum battery voltage calculation
U Bat w U min ) 2 @ R K ) 2 @ l @
P R L @ in 2 U min
Example: Umin = 10V, Pin = 100W RK = 20mW (estimated transition resistances of terminals and plug connectors) R L = 24mW/m (cable resistance with cable cross-section of 0.75mm2) l = 3m (cable length) UBat w 11.12V
ATTENTION
Keep the cable short and avoid unnecessary transition resistances to keep the voltage drop as small as possible.
B-72
Connecting MGCsplit
Minimum required battery voltage UBat [V]
Battery voltage [V]
Cable length [m]
Connecting MGCsplit
B-73
5.3
Amplifier modules and connection boards in the 1SH400 enclosure Amplifier modules that can be connected
5.3.1
The following amplifier modules from the MGCplus system can be used in the MGCsplit system (with effect from hardware version 1.31 and higher):
Amplifier module ML01B ML10B ML30B ML35B ML50B ML55B ML55BS6 ML60B ML70B ML71B ML71S6 ML77B ML78B ML460 ML801B Software version P5.33 P5.33 P5.33 P5.33 P5.33 P5.33 P5.33 P5.20 P1.33 P1.80 P1.28 P2.02 P1.53 P1.13 P5.18
B-74
Connecting MGCsplit
5.3.2
Connection boards
You can use any connection board from the MGCplus system. In the case of the transducer excitation the following special features apply: AP17 The torque transducers must be energized by means of an external power supply (except for T10FSF1 and SU2). AP460i The transducer excitation (DC) may be adjusted to 5 V, 8 V, 16 V. Maximum current per connection board is 50 mA. AP801S6 The transducer excitation may be 8 V or 16 V. Maximum output current is 50 mA.
Note
In the event of higher loads the module concerned may be automatically shut down.
Connecting MGCsplit
B-75
5.4
Connecting the MGCsplit modules
1SH400CP ABX22A external display and control panel Input Output
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Input Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use SDA_out *) Not in use SDA_in
*)
Output Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V Link1+ Link1 Link2+ Link2 Rx_A Rx_B Tx_A Tx_B ResOut GND digital Sync_A Sync_B
Suitable connector Connection end view

1
12 13 14 15 16
Not in use ResIn*) GND digital *) SCL *) Not in use
16
*)
I2C interface and reset are only necessary when using the NT650 power pack
Device connectors: Recommended male plug: (suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm)
G82B0CT16LFG00000 S32B0CT16PFG07500
B-76
Connecting MGCsplit
5.5
Inputs/outputs for measurement modules SH400/SH650
1SH400
Pin 1 2 3
Input Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V Link1+ Link1 Link2+ Link2 Rx_A Rx_B Tx_A Tx_B ResIn GND digital Sync_A Sync_B
Output Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 24 32 V DC (typically 28 V) Power supply 0 V Power supply 0 V Link1+ Link1 Link2+ Link2 Rx_A Rx_B Tx_A Tx_B ResOut GND digital Sync_A Sync_B
Input Output
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1SH650
11 12 13 14 15 16
Input Output
Device connectors: Recommended male plug:
G82B0CT16LFG00000 S32B0CT16PFG07500
(suitable for crimp fit and cable diameters 7 mm to 7.5 mm)
Suitable connector (Connection end view)

1
16
Connecting MGCsplit
B-77
5.6
AP409 connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure
1SH650ML801B409 1SH650ML801B2x409
Pin 1 2
Function + Input Input
Device connectors:
GX0S0CP0200000002*)
Transducer connections AP409
Recommended male plugs: SX0S0CP0200000002 (solder contacts, K-Type) S30S0CT02PJD05000 (crimp contacts, gold) S30S0CT02MJG05000 (solder contacts, gold) (suitable for cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm)
*)
Contacts made of K-type thermal material, to avoid measuring errors by temperature gradients of the connector.
1 S 2
B-78
Connecting MGCsplit
5.7
1SH650ML801B401 1SH650ML801B2x401
Pin 1 2 3 4
Function + Input Not in use Not in use Input
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Transducer connections AP401
Device connectors: G80S0CT04LFD00000 Recommended male plug: S30S0CT04MFD05000 (suitable for solder contacts and cable diameters 4.5 mm to 5 mm)

2 1 3 S
Connecting MGCsplit
B-79
5.8
AP815i connection boards in the 1SH650 enclosure
1SH650ML801B815
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Half and Full bridge function Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () GND (inner shield) Not in use Not in use Not in use Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
Quarter bridge function Measurement signal (+) Excitation voltage () Not in use Excitation voltage (+) GND (inner shield) Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Sensor circuit ()
Transducer connections
Device connectors: G82B0CT10QJ000000

Recommended male plugs: S32B0CT10PJD08000 (crimp contacts) S32B0CT10MJD08000 (solder contacts)
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
(suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm) See also connection diagrams SG full bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.3 SG half bridges with AP810/AP815i in chapter 4.6 Single strain gage with AP815i in chapter 4.7.5
B-80
Connecting MGCsplit
5.9
1SH650ML460460
Pin 1 2 3 4
Function Frequency signal 1, input a Frequency signal 1, input b Frequency signal 2, input a Frequency signal 2, input b Zero index, input a Zero index, input b Transducer supply 5V*) Transducer identification Transducer supply ground Signal ground
1 2 3 4
Transducer connections
5 6 7 8 9 10
Device connectors: G82B0CT10QJ000000

1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Recommended male plugs: S32B0CT10PJD08000 (crimp contacts) S32B0CT10MJD08000 (solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
*)
Maximum total current for all subchannels is 50 mA
Connecting MGCsplit
B-81
5.10
1SH650ML55BAP13i 1SH650ML10BAP13i 1SH650ML30BAP13i
Digital inputs
The following are valid for all single-channel connection boards: Digital inputs: (30 coded female connector) Digital outputs: (30 coded female connector) Analog outputs: (30 coded female connector) Transducers: (0 coded female connector) Digital inputs:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function Ground (control inputs 1/2/3/4) Ground (control inputs 5/6/7/8) Control input 1 Control input 2 Control input 3 Control input 4 Control input 5 Control input 6 Control input 7 Control input 8

1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Device connectors: G82BACT10QJ000000 (30 coding) Recommended male plugs: S32BACT10PJD08000 (30 coding; crimp contacts) S32BACT10MJD08000 (30 coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
B-82
Connecting MGCsplit
Digital outputs:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function 24 V (limit value 1/2) 24 V (limit value 3/4) Ground (limit value 1/2) Ground (limit value 3/4) Limit value output 1 Limit value output 2 Limit value output 3 Limit value output 4 Warning Not in use
Digital outputs
Device connectors: G82BACT10QJ000000 (30 coding)

1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Recommended male plugs: S32BACT10PJD08000 (30 coding; crimp contacts) S32BACT10MJD08000 (30 coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
Connecting MGCsplit
B-83
Analog outputs:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Function Analog ground Voltage output Ua1 Not in use Voltage output Ua2 Not in use Current output Ia1 Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use
Analog outputs
8 9 10
Device connectors: G82BACT10QJ000000 (30 coding)

1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Recommended male plug: S32BACT10PJD08000 (30 coding; crimp contacts) S32BACT10MJD08000 (30 coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
B-84
Connecting MGCsplit
Transducers:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Measurement signal (+) Bridge excitation voltage () Bridge excitation voltage (+) Measurement signal () GND +16 V 16 V SDA Sensor circuit (+) Sensor circuit ()
Transducer connection
9 10
Device connectors: G82B0CT10QJ000000 (0 coding)

1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Recommended male plugs: S32B0CT10PJD08000 (0 coding; crimp contacts) S32B0CT10MJD08000 (0 coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
Connecting MGCsplit
B-85
5.11
1SH650ML60BAP17
Digital inputs
The following are valid for all singlechannel connection boards: Digital inputs: (30 coded female connector) Digital outputs: (30 coded female connector) Analog outputs: (30 coded female connector) Transducers: (0 coded female connector) Digital inputs
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function Ground (digital) Control input 1 Control input 2 Control input 3 Control input 4 Control input 5 Control input 6 Control input 7 Control input 8 Not in use
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
10
B-86
Connecting MGCsplit
1SH650ML60BAP17
Digital outputs
Pin 1 2 3 Function Ground (digital) Limit value output 1 Limit value output 2 Limit value output 3 Limit value output 4 Warning Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use
Digital outputs
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Connecting MGCsplit
B-87
1SH650ML60BAP17
Analog outputs
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function Analog ground to Vo1 Voltage output Vo1 (Ra>5 kOhm) Analog ground to Vo2 Voltage output Vo2 (Ra>5 kOhm) Analog ground to Vo1 / Io1 Vo1 / Io1 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm Analog ground to Vo2 / Io2 Vo2 / Io2 (20 mA); Ra<500 Ohm Not in use Not in use
Analog outputs
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
B-88
Connecting MGCsplit
1SH650ML60BAP17
Transducers
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function Frequency signal 1, input a Frequency signal 1, input b Frequency signal 2, input a Frequency signal 2, input b Zero index, input a Zero index, input b Transducer supply +5 V*) Transducer identification Transducer supply ground Signal ground
Transducer connection
Device connectors: G82B0CT10QJ000000 (0 coding) Recommended male plugs: S32B0CT10PJD08000 (0 coding; crimp contacts) S32B0CT10MJD08000 (0 coding; solder contacts) (suitable for cable diameters 7.5 mm to 8 mm)
*)
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Maximum output current is 50 mA. Please note that torque transducers cannot be fed from this supply.
Connecting MGCsplit
B-89
5.12
1SH650ML71BAP71
1
CAN connections 1 to 2
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function Not in use CAN_L CAN_GND CAN_V+ CAN_Shield GND CAN_H Not in use Not in use Not in use
CAN connections
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
B-90
Connecting MGCsplit
5.13
1SH650ML78BAP78
The AP78 connection board has a total of ten analog outputs, two of which are looped through from the ML78B amplifier (VO1 and VO2). Connection 1 (analog output VO1)
Analog outputs
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function GND to Vo1 Analog output from amplifier VO1 Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use
Connection 2 (analog output VO2)

Pin Function GND to Vo2 Analog output from amplifier VO2 Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Connecting MGCsplit
B-91
1SH650ML78BAP78
Connection 3 (analog outputs AO3 to AO6)

Pin Function GND to AO3 Analog output AO3 GND to AO4 Analog output AO4 GND to AO5 Analog output AO5 GND to AO6 Analog output AO6 Not in use Not in use
1 2 3 4 5
Analog outputs
6 7 8 9 10
Connection 4 (analog outputs AO7 to AO10)

Pin 1 2
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Function GND to AO7 Analog output AO7 GND to AO8 Analog output AO8 GND to AO9 Analog output AO9 GND to AO10 Analog output AO10 Not in use Not in use
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B-92
Connecting MGCsplit
1SH650ML78BAP78
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
Connecting MGCsplit
B-93
5.14
1SH650ML78BAP75
Connection 1 (digital outputs 1 to 4, analog output 1)

Pin Function GND OUT OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 24 V IN Not in use Not in use GND VO1 VO1
Digital outputs and analog outputs
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connection 2 (digital outputs 5 to 8, analog output 2)

Pin 1 2
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Function GND OUT OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 24 V IN Not in use Not in use GND VO2 VO2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B-94
Connecting MGCsplit
1SH650ML78BAP75
Connection 3 (digital inputs 1 to 4):

Pin Function GND IN IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use
1 2 3 4 5
Digital inputs
6 7 8 9 10
Connection 4 (digital inputs 5 to 8):

Pin 1 2
1 2 3 4 9 10 5 8 7 6
Function GND IN IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use Not in use
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connecting MGCsplit
B-95
1SH650ML78BAP75
1 2 3 4 9 10
8 7 6 5
B-96
Connecting CANHEAD
Connecting CANHEAD modules
The ML74 communication card and the AP74 connector plate are required for connecting CANHEAD modules to the MGCplus systems. A maximum of 12 modules per plugin amplifier and 24 modules per MGCplus device can be connected, this amounts to a total of 240 measuring points (a maximum of 256 channels per CP22/CP42 can be managed in the device). For more information on connection and operation please refer to the CANHEAD Measurement electronics mounting instructions.
Connecting CANHEAD
B-97
6.1
ML74 communication module
LED ML74 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Labeling CHAN. ERROR/ WARN. Rx Tx OVRN BUS/ERR CONFIG AP74 STATUS SCAN
Color Yellow Red Yellow Yellow Red Red Yellow Yellow Off Red Yellow
Meaning Channel has been selected Error/Warning Receiving CAN protocol Transmitting CAN protocol Overrun Bus error Configuring allocated CANHEADS Voltage supply via AP74 No voltage supply via AP74 Error during voltage supply via AP74 Executing bus scan
8 9
B-98
Connecting CANHEAD
6.2
AP74 connection board
AP74
LED color Green Red None
Meaning Normal state during operation Short circuit or overload Voltage supply switched off
Connecting Interfaces
B-99
Connecting the computer, PLC and printer
The MGCplus can optionally be fitted with the following interfaces: Serial interfaces for computer port (CP22/CP42): RS 232 C USB Ethernet
B-100
Connecting Shunt resistor
Connecting a shunt resistor
For connection boards there also exists, as an optional solution, a facility for switching the shunt on. An off-the-shelf shunt on-switch is provided for the AP14 connection board. This compensating resistor creates a bridge mismatch of 1 mV/V.
Connecting Outputs and remotes
B-101
9 9.1
Inputs, Outputs and remotes Inputs and Outputs CP22/CP42
CP42
RS 232 CARDBUS
The CP22 communication processor provides one digital input and output each. The CP42 communication processor provides two digital inputs and outputs each. The digital In and Outputs must be operated with an external feeding (12 V ... 24 V). Inputs (0 V ... 24 V) The following functions can be assigned to the digital inputs:
USB DEVICE
Start data acquisition by external trigger (only with CP42) Print measured values (with direct connection via USB interface) Formfeed The MGCplus terminal commands can also be used to query the status of the inputs and outputs. Outputs (0 V ... 24 V) The digital outputs are allocated to the Disc full function. If the remaining storage space on the PC card harddisk in the CP42 unit is lower than 1 MByte, the output will be set to high. No function is assigned to the digital outputs. The MGCplus terminal commands can be used to modify the status.
USB HOST
ETHERNET
Inputs and outputs
B-102
Wiring example for the Start Trigger function at the CP42 control inputs
CP42
COM NO NC
CTRL I/O
+ 24V DC
24V
GND1
IN
B-103
Wiring example for the Print measured values function at the CP22 control inputs
COM
CP22
NO
NC
IN 24Vext GNDext
CTRL I/O
+ 24V DC
B-104
9.2
Analogue output on the front panel
The front panel of a one-channel module includes a female BNC connector for analogue output signal VO1. (This female connector is for test purposes. The fixed wiring should always go through the connection boards, since the noise voltage is smaller here).
NOTE
Please note: the input resistance of the connected device must be greater than 1 MW. When connecting a coaxial cable to the analog output of the ML60B preamplifier module for use in Class B environments, acc. to EN55011 or EN55022 (residential premises, business and trade, and small businesses), a ferrite (Wrth, art. No. 742 711 72 or similar) must be attached to the cable.
B-105
9.3
Connection boards AP01i...AP18i
Connection boards for the amplifier channels are plugged in at the back of the desktop housing, respectively on the right-hand side of the wall-mounted housing. The female connector on these connection boards provide you not only with connection facilities for the transducer, but also with several output and control signals, depending on the chosen option. These are explained in greater detail in the following chapters.
B-106
9.3.1
Pin assignment AP01i/03i/05/08/09/11i/14/17/18i
PIN
Function Digital Remote 1 Remote 2 Remote 3 Remote 4 Remote 5 Remote 6 Remote 7 Remote 8 VO2/IO2 (20 mA); Ro<500 VO1/IO1 (20 mA); Ro<500 VO2 (Ro>5 k) VO1 (Ro>5 k) Digital Output of LIV1 Output of LIV2 Output of LIV3 Output of LIV4 Warning to pin10 to pin 11 Analogue to pin 12 to pin 13 Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Input Output Output Output Output Output
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
13
25
Bu 2 Outputs OUTPUT
Table 9.1 Bu2
B-107
Output pin assignments Analogue output Pin 10 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a voltage signal or as a current signal. Vo= 0...10 V, Ro >500 W Io = 0...20 mA or +4...20 mA; Ro <500 W Pin 11 is only used if the connection board is fitted with the EM001 final stage module. This must be installed as described in chapter 9.3.2. The switch position determines whether the output signal is made available as a voltage signal or as a current signal. Vo=0...10 V, Ro500 W Io=0...20 mA or +4...20 mA, Ro<500 W
NOTE
Connection boards AP08/14/17/18i may only be fitted with one final stage module. In this case pin 11 is used and pin 10 is left free. On pin 12 you will find analogue output signal VO2. The connected load resistance must be greater than 5 kW. On pin 13 you will find analogue output signal VO1 exactly as on the BNC female connector on the front panel. Signals S1 to S4 are to be assigned as required to outputs V01 (Bu2 and BNC) and V02 (Bu2 only). Bu2: Ro >5 kW BNC: Ro >1 MW
B-108
On pins 17 to 20 you will find the connection states for limit switches 1 to 4. Their connection states are indicated by two different HCMOS voltage levels: Positive logic: Level 0V: Limit switch OFF Level 5V: Limit switch ON
Pin 21 carries a level of 5 V (high level), which can be used as a warning signal. In the event of a fault for example a break in the transducer cable the output signal is set to 0 V (low). On the other hand, this signal is also set to zero during the autocalibration cycle (every 5 min., for approx.1 s).
Remotes On pins 2 to 9 of female connector 2 you will find remotes Ctrl 1 to 8 for controlling certain of the amplifiers functions. These remotes are active if they have been enabled via an AB22A/AB32 display and control panel, i.e. in REMOTE operating mode. The tasks assigned to these remotes can be freely selected. The available functions are shown in chapter F Additional functions together with their descriptions. In the factory preset, the remotes are not defined.
External triggering Remote 7 is used as an external trigger input. For AP13i (Remote contact 7) see page B-49.
B-109
Additional notes on the AP17: Pin assignment of the input socket

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
*)
Function Shield Zero-Index (+) Zero-Index () Ground Supply voltage transducer 16 V (max. 500 mA) *) Supply voltage transducer +16 V (max. 500 mA) *) no function Ground SDA for the XM001 external memory module SLC for the XM001 external memory module Supply voltage transducer 5 V (max. 300 mA) *) F1+ rotation speed 0, angle of rotation, torque, frequency F1 rotation speed 0, angle of rotation, torque, frequency F2 rotation speed 90, calibration signal trigger F2+ rotation speed 90, calibration signal trigger
I/O Input Input Output Output
Input Output Output Input Input Input/Output Input/Output
The data on current indicates the maximum continuous currents which are permissible on the AP17. There is no restriction on the number of connection boards per enclosure, but a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the transducer power supply (for instance 5 V/16 V for the T10FSF1 torque flange).
B-110
When there are long cables (>100 m) and high frequencies (>200 kHz) it is necessary to switch on terminating resistances. For this purpose the AP17 motherboard has a triple DIP switch S2, which must be switched to the ON position.
AP17
ON
3 2 1 Switch S2
Component layout AP17
B-111
AP02
Relay contacts Another possible option is to use RM001 relay modules in conjunction with the AP02 connection board (with or without front panel). Depending how the relay modules are fitted to this connection board, they are available to relay contacts Limit1/2 or Limit3/4. These signals are carried on 37-pin female connector Bu3 (see Table 9.2).
B-112
PIN
Function Analogue Digital +10 V excitation pot. LV 10 V excitation pot. LV HCMOS Limit1 HCMOS Limit2 HCMOS Limit3 HCMOS Limit4 Central contact Normally open contact Normally closed contact Central contact Normally open contact Normally closed contact Central contact Normally open contact Normally closed contact Central contact Normally open contact Normally closed contact no function no function no function no function no function no function no function no function Limit4 Limit3 RM001 (BU403) Limit2 Limit1 RM001 (BU404) >5k
20
1 2 29 20 36 6 17 10 37 7
19
37
Bu 3
19 8 18
Explanations about the table: Control signal for relay modules 1 to 4: HCMOS Limit1...4
9 16 11 15 12 14 13 33 32 31 30 26 25 24 23
Table 9.2 Bu3
B-113
AP07/1
If you wish to take measurements with torque transducers in the T3..FN/FNA and T10FKF1 series, you have AP07/1 connection board available. The AP07/1 has only one female connector for torque. Outputs torque, rotation speed, performance (scaled) The pin assignment for female connectors MD, N and P (scaled) is shown in Table 9.3.
B-114
PIN
Function (MD, N, P scaled) Digital Remote 1 Remote 2 Remote 3 Remote 4 Remote 5 Remote 6 Remote 7 Remote 8 Limit switch Limit1, normally open contact Vo1= " 10 V; Io1= "20 mA/+4...+20 mA Voltage output Vo2 = "10 V; Ro>5 k Voltage output Vo1 = "10 V; Ro>5 k Limit switch Limit1, normally closed contact Limit switch Limit1, central contact Limit switch 1; status Limit switch 2; status Limit switch 3; status Limit switch 4; status Warning Limit switch Limit2, normally closed contact Limit switch Limit2, normally open contact Limit switch Limit2, central contact Zero operating voltage, analogue HCMOS 5 V logic
14
1 2 3 4 5
13
25
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Female connector MD, N, P scaled
Table 9.3 Female connector MD, N, P
B-115
The outputs torque, rotation speed and scaled performance can only be fitted with one final stage module each. The analogue output signal is carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. Sliding switches and DIP switches are used to make the choice between voltage output and current output. The switch positions are described in chapter 9.3.2. The relay contacts for limit switches Limit1 and Limit2 are available on pins 10, 14, 15 or 22, 23, 24 if the relay module is fitted. There is only provision for fitting with one relay module. Output multiplier The pin assignment for female connector P (unscaled) is shown in the table below. The analogue output signal is carried on pin 11 if the final stage module is fitted. There is only provision for this option.
PIN 110,12,1421 11 13 Function (P unscaled) no function Vo1 = "10 V; Io1 = " 20 mA/+4...+20 mA Voltage output Vo1 = "10 V; Ro>5 k
B-116
AP13i
Input assignments (Pin-assignments for remote contact 1):

PLC AP13i
AP13i connection board makes remote contacts and limit switch outputs, as well as the 24 V-level warning output, available for direct connection to I/Os on programmable logic controllers. Control I/Os are potential-segregated by optical coupler and arranged in a number of groups, each with its own grounding system. These groups are identified by shading in the AP13i connection diagram. Functions of remote contacts shown between brackets refer to the factory preset. You are free to allocate these functions to whichever remote contacts you please. In the case of the AP13i, the only available option is an EM001 final stage module.
Output Ground
(1)
Remote contact Associated ground
(14)
External
HBM
Output assignments (Pin-assignments for output of LIV1):
CAUTION
Input Ground
24V Output of LIV
Ground
AP13i connection boards are specially adapted for ML30B or ML50B/55B amplifiers. Please do not interchange these amplifier types.
Power supply
24V 0V
External
HBM
B-117
Pin assignment for the AP13i:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Remote contact 1 Remote contact 2 Ground (Remote contacts 3/4) Remote contact 5 Remote contact 6 Ground (Remote contacts 7/8) 24V (Limit switch 1/2) Ground (Limit switch 1/2) 24V (Limit switch 3/4, warning) Ground (Limit switch 3/4, warning) Current output Io1 Voltage output Vo2 Voltage output Vo1 Ground (Remote contacts 1/2) Remote contact 3 Remote contact 4 Ground (Remote contacts 5/6) Remote contact 7 Remote contact 8 Output of LIV1 Output of LIV2 Output of LIV3 Output of LIV4 Warning Analogue earth
1 14
13
25
Bu 2
B-118
Remote contacts: On the remote contacts the logic in relation to HCMOS levels is reversed in the case of the other connection boards.
Function ACAL TARE CPV1/2 HLD1/2 ZERO REMT SHNT PRNT CAL ZERO INV PSEL1 PSEL2 PSEL3 PSEL4 REMT Remote control contacts inactive Remote control contacts active Peak value 1/2 is stored Peak value stores 1/2 not frozen Remote control contacts inactive Shunt off When printing is enabled the channel is taken into account Level 0 V Autocal ON taring starts on transition 0 V 24 V Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value Contents of peak value stores 1/2 frozen Remote control contacts active Shunt on When printing is enabled the channel is not taken into account Input is switched to internal calibration source Input is switched to zero signal Polarity is switched over (ML60B only) Level 24 V Autocal OFF
Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 0 V 24 V
Remote control outputs:

Function Limit switches Warning Level 0 V Limit switches OFF Device not ready or error (e.g. overflow) Level 24 V Limit switches ON No error
B-119
AP77
Profibus
The pin assignment of the 9-pin female D-Sub connector conforms to the Profibus standard.
Pin 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Function RS485B RS485RTS GND VCC RS485A GND
You can find more information in the Operating Manual MGCplus Profibus Interface.
B-120
9.3.2
Installing the EM001 final stage module
Output stage module EM001
The EM001 final stage module can only be used with connection boards without transducer recognition. For correct positioning on the connection boards mother board the EM001 final stage module has been marked with the numeral 1 on the bottom left corner and a triangle on the left side. These symbols have also been printed onto the mother board. After having inserted the final stage module, you have to select the switch and bridge positions according to the desired output signal (see tables).
Mother board
B-121
AP07/1
The AP07/1 has slots for one EM001 final stage module and one RM001 relay module.
Output stage module EM001
The chart shows the arrangement on the motherboard. The final stage module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP switch. The switch position necessary for the output signal you require is shown in the following table.
Relay module RM001*)

Output signal Switch DIP switches
1 2
*)
1
"10 V
Output P has no slot for RM001 1

"20 mA
1
+4...20 mA
B-122
AP08/14/17/18
These connection boards are all equipped with a slot for an EM001.
2 EM001 1
The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the AP08/17/18.
The accompanying chart shows the motherboard layout for the AP14.
NOTE
1 EM001 2
Pay careful attention to the name (numbering) on the switch. The deciding factor for the switch position in Table 9.4 is the numbering on the switch and not its location.
B-123
This table shows the switch position necessary for the output signal you require.
Output signal
Switch
DIP switches
1
"10 V
1
"20 mA
1
+4...20 mA
Table 9.4: AP08/14/17/18
B-124
AP09
AP09 connection board can have two slots for final stage modules of the EM001 type.
EM001 slot 1
If these connection boards are ordered without final stage modules, they are supplied without slots. The accompanying chart shows the arrangement on the motherboards. Each final stage module is assigned to a sliding switch and a DIP switch. The switch position necessary for the output signal you require is shown in the following table.
for 2 Output signal Switch DIP switches
EM001
slot
1 2 for 2 for 1
1 2 for
1
1 "10 V
1
"20 mA
1
+4...20 mA
C-1
Commissioning
C-2
Commissioning Switching on
C-3
Commissioning
This chapter shows you the necessary steps to take in order to make your measurement chain (amplifier system and transducer) ready for use. You will then be in a position to carry out a function test of all components. The various steps are deliberately explained in very general terms, without going into detail about specific transducers or amplifier plug-in modules. However, it is very easy to apply the description to your own measurement chain. In some instances especially to do with connecting transducers reference will be made to later chapters. We also warn about certain errors which can typically occur during commissioning. After initial commissioning and adapting the amplifier plug-in module to your transducer, you are in a position to get to know the other functions and facilities of the MGCplus amplifier system.
Unpack the MGCplus. Check that the MGCplus is undamaged. Is the delivery complete? Compare the contents of packages with the accompanying documentation list. Is the documentation complete?
C-4
1.1
Devices in the desktop housing and rack frame
If you have not yet received your complete amplifier system, you should take note of the following points when putting the system together: The amplifier plug-in units are plugged in at the front panel and the associated connection boards are plugged in at the back. It is important to ensure correct allocation during this step: If using wide connection boards (8 divisions), you must plug these into slots 1, 3, 5 etc. Slots 2, 4, 6 etc. on the front panel must be left free or with fitted blank plates. On safety grounds, all unused slots (amplifiers or connection boards) must be covered over with blank plates.
Check that all amplifiers and connection boards are firmly plugged in. Connect the device to the mains supply with the mains cable provided. Connect your transducer to the female connector provided on the connection board (reference BU01). If you use a cable you have made up yourself, please adhere to the pin assignment for your transducer as shown in chapter B.
Please note the safety instructions on page A-3.
C-5
Switch the device on with the POWER button on the front panel of the device (in the case of the MGCCompact 2-channel housing, there is a toggle switch on the back of the device). When the AB22A/AB32 is initialized (at which time all LEDs light up for a moment) it makes a note of the components that are present.
MGCplus Start-up
Switching on
If no transducer is connected, an overflow is displayed. The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value display of the 1 value type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system, the display, the amplifier and the additional functions.
MGC Compact
Back of the device NP05:
Switching on
C-6
We recommend that you set up the language first if you require a language other than German.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time
LANGUAGE
Language: Deutsch
Deutsch English Francais
D-1
Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32
D-2
MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Control elements
D-3
1 1.1
Control elements AB22A control elements
All settings on your device are carried out with the keys on the AB22A/AB32 display and control panel. Using the shift key (SET) you can select the Measure or Set-up operating modes.
Function keys F1...F4 Effective in measurement mode and set-up mode Delete key Clears the last entries to input fields Help key Activates online help texts for certain functions Cancel (Escape) key Resets last entry in menus and selection fields; closes help texts Alphanumeric keypad For entering numbers, letters or special characters into the Power switch edit fields
Display
Channel selection keys Selecting the active channel Shift key Switches between measuring mode and set-up mode.
Cursor keys Measuring mode: Cursor control Set-up mode: Moving through the menu
Confirmation key Activates the settings that have been entered
D-4
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Control elements
1.2
AB32 control elements
Display Channel selection keys Selecting the active channel
Help key Activates online help for the active functions.
Delete key Clears the entire entry in edit fields
Power switch
Function keys Effective in measurement mode and set-up mode; freely assignable for measuring mode
Shift key Switches between measuring mode and set-up mode.
Confirmation key Activates the settings that have been entered
Alphanumeric keypad For entering numbers, letters or special characters into the edit fields in the display
Cursor keys Measuring mode: Select signal (Gross, Net, Peak values) Selecting display mode (one or multi-channel) Moving through the selection and set-up menus Cancel (Escape) key Resets the last entry in menus or selection fields and closes help texts.
Set-up mode:
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Display
D-5
2 2.1
Display The first display
MGCplus Start-up
When the power is switched on, a progressively moving horizontal bar is displayed to indicate that the device is initialising. The opening display is followed in the standard version by a value display of the 1 value type (factory setting). Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up mode, in which you can configure the system, the display, the amplifier and the additional functions. We recommend that you set up the language first if you require a language other than German.
D-6
2.2
Display in measuring mode
Display for 1 value type The chapter called Display deals fully with setting up the various screen types. The following section gives you an overview of the factory preset display types.
Channel name (freely definable)
Output signal Gross Net Peak values Limit switches
Status limit switch
Gross Channel
Number of the selected channel (maximum 16 or 16.8 in the case of multi-channel modules)
Status line Function keys (in this example, in measuring mode, 1st level)
Measure
Measure
Measurement value Unit
D-7
Gross Gross Gross Measure Gross Gross Gross Measure

1ML55B
Display with 3 values type

Use to go to the next type
Gross Gross Gross
Display for 6 values type

Gross
Display for YT-Diagram type

Measure
1ML55B
Gross
Display for XY-Diagram type

1ML55B
Gross
Measure
Limit switches 1Limit1 1Limit2 1Limit3 1Limit4
LIVOn LIVOff LIVOn LIVOff
Display for Status limit switch type

Measure
DATA ACQUISITION
TIME: 00: 00: 00 1 4.0S FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA 16.0S 120 MB FREE SAMPLERATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100
Display for Data acquisition type

Get DAQ1
Acal
D-8
Symbols in the display The status line tells you about the status of a measuring device at that instant: B
Gross
Channel
Status line
Measure
Measure
Measure, Zero, Calibrate
Acal
Amplifier input status Status display of parameter set memory Numbers 1...8 Number of the current parameter set S X / Factory setting User-defined set-up; displayed when a parameter set has been modified Read next/previous parameter set
Acal
Automatic calibration on (function Acal) Computer interface is active Data transmission over link
D-9
Status of limit switches. If the On level that has been set for a limit switch is exceeded, the number of the switch concerned is underlined in black in the display. Example: On level of limit switch 1 is exceeded Local Remote Remote off Remote on
Channel 1 Channel 3.2
Channel number of a one-channel module
Channel number of a multi-channel module
Number of the sub-channel Slot number in the system enclosure
D-10
2.3
Messages on the AB22A/AB32
The following messages may be displayed on devices fitted with a CP42 communications processor:
Message in the display CP42 hard disk full! Error configuring channels x, y, z! Cause The capacity of the PCMCIA hard disk has been exceeded. a) The measuring amplifier types x, y, z do not agree with the types in the configuration file (modules changed). b) There is no amplifier plug-in module present. The following channels have been configured: x, y, z Wrong hard disk! Information about a successful configuration of channels x, y, z The PCMCIA hard disk contains a file (Ident.txt) in which the Serial No. of a CP42 is stored. This Serial No. does not match the Serial No. of the existing CP42. The measuring range has been exceeded (Gross, Net or both). Check the assignment of the CP42 hard disk, and if necessary delete file Ident.txt (see also Operating Manual MGCplus Assistant; CP42 serial number). a) Check the values in the zero buffer and/or tare buffer. b) Carry out taring or a zero balance. c) Increase the measuring range. a) No feedback circuits connected and Autocal has been triggered. b) Connection board has been changed. c) RAM/EEPROM error d) Calibration curve not in order a) Check the transducer connection, then trigger autocalibration. b) Carry out a set-up. c) Carry out a set-up. d) Check the transducer settings (transducer type, excitation voltage, output characteristics). Remedy Install a new hard disk or delete data. Check the equipment of the MGCplus device.
Overflow (In status mode the red ERROR/WARN. LED lights up on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module). Calibration error (In status mode the red ERROR/WARN. LED lights up on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module).
(In status mode, the red ERROR/WARN. LED on the front panel of the amplifier module lights up)
Functions and symbols on the AB22A / AB32 Set-up mode
D-11
AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode
The set-ups for the MGCplus unit are subdivided into groups according to their function. Pressing the shift key takes you to the set-up dialogue. Ihe selection bar and the number of the channel, the settings will have an effect on, is displayed.
Display in set-up mode
Settings for channel:

System Display Amplifier
3.2 ...
Options
System
System-specific settings that in most cases are only carried out during the initial start-up or for a new measurement task.
Display
User-defined display settings such as the required method of representing values, function key assignment, or the specification of channel names.
Amplifier
Options
Selection bar
Amplifier set-ups for Additional set-ups for each channel, taking each individual into account such amplifier. things as transducer type, amplifier plug-in module or conditioning.
D-12
Switch to the set-up dialogue by pressing the shift key
. The lower part of the display is a selection bar showing
the topics to which the function keys immediately below them (F1...F4) are assigned (selection level 1). You can set up your unit in various menus which you call up from the selection bar in the display. Depending on the function, you can call up to 4 menu levels (selection and setup levels). In the first two levels you select topics; you are in the selection levels. In the next levels you set up certain values or switch functions on/off. You are then in the setup levels. Example: Setting up a system password
Selection level 1 Selection level 2
Password Password System Display
Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language
Pop-up menu
Password
User:
Setup level 1
new chang Add e user set User: delete
Selection bar
System
Display
Amp Password: Access: System Display
Setup level 2
Set-up window
Amp Password:
Access: Operator OK Cancel
Set-up window
D-13
3.1
Calling up menus
Press the shift key
. At first only the selection bar is displayed. If you now press one of the function keys to the required topic (in this case Language) and
F1...F4, the corresponding pull-up menu appears above the topic concerned (in this example System). Move the bright bar through the pull-up menu with the cursor keys press the confirmation key . You are now in the setup level for the selected topic. The current setup window can take you to other setup levels.
Selection level 1 Selection bar Selection level 2

Pull-up menu
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time
Bright bar
Setup level 1
Selection window
English
Deutsch English English Francais
D-14
3.2
Quitting menus
If you want to quit a menu level, press the shift key or one of the function keys F1...F4 or (if present) the key symbol
Cancel
Result: You return to measuring mode Result: You return to selection level 2
or
OK
Result: You return to the previous menu level
Measuring mode
1ML30B Gross Channel
Selection level 1
Selection level 2
System Password Displa Password
Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language
Setup level 1
Password
.... .... new change set .... .... Operator OK Cancel delete Password: Access:
System
Displa User:
System
Add user
Displa
User: Password: Access:
....
Setup level 2
Save set-up?
Yes No Cancel
Before quitting a menu widow and returning to measuring mode, you are still able to save or clear the set-ups you have entered, or cancel your intention to quit the dialogue window. A security prompt is therefore displayed alongside. In this case the factory preset is Yes. Confirm with .
D-15
3.3
Channel selection in measuring mode
There are two ways in which you can select a channel in measuring mode: 1. By using the channel selection keys .
2. By directly inputting the channel number using the alphanumeric keypad (recommended for multi-channel modules). Here are two examples of method 2: Example 1: Selecting a channel on a one-channel module Press the numeric key for the desired channel (for example 7) The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the channel number requested: Channel 7 Confirm with .
Example 2: Selecting a sub-channel on a multi-channel module Press the numeric key for the required slot (for example 3) The indicator then displays the channel text box showing the slot number requested: Channel 3 (If you then use to confirm, the first sub-channel is automatically selected, which in this case is 3.1).
Type in a point and then the required sub-channel number: Channel 3.2
Confirm with
.
D-16
3.4
Channel selection in set-up mode
In most of the set-up windows on the AB22A/AB32, the column header shows the name of the currently selected set-up menu and the channel selected.
Channel text box CHANNEL NAME Channel
3.2
Channel name:
2ML55B
There are two ways in which you can select a channel in set-up mode: 1. By using the channel selection keys (select the channels one after another).
2. By entering the channel number in the channel text box. You have the option to skip directly from one channel to any other channel of your choice. Press the cursor key , to go to the channel text box in the column header.
Type in the required channel number (for instance 3.2 in the case of a multi-channel module). Confirm with .
D-17
3.5
Saving the set-ups
All settings that you enter before the security prompt are temporarily stored in working memory (RAM) as soon as . The data are permanently saved as soon as you quit set-up you make an amendment and confirm it with mode and confirm the security prompt with Yes.
Volatile memory (8h) RAM
Amplifier
Factory settings EPROM
save load EEPROM Permanent save parameter set 1...8
D-18
3.6
Selection menus
Example:
You select topics from the first two selection levels. You do this in the first level (menu bar) by pressing the corresponding function keys, and in the second level by selecting from pop-up menus. Select and confirm in selection fields (pull-up menu)
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with
D-19
3.7
Elements in the set-up window
At set-up level you enter the parameters via set-up windows. The set-up windows contain dialogue boxes, of which there can be vier different types. SETUP WINDOW
Activation fields Dialogue boxes

Abs Gross Net
Selection field
1V Excitation 2.5V 5V
Edit field
User:
Button Cancel
Switching on or off in activation fields

Abs Gross Net
Example:
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm the selection with . A tick appears in the selected box (activated). Pressing the confirmation key again cancels the activated status. Channel-related activation fields Example:
SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT OK Cancel All channels All signals
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status
D-20
Multi-channel modules are identified by two points below the channel number (channel 8 in the example). If you select the activation field for a multi-channel module and use activation fields for the various sub-channels. Example:
SELECT SIGNALS FOR PRINTOUT OK Cancel All channels All signals
to enable it, a new set-up window opens with
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 .. 8 9 10111213141516 Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status
8.
1 2 3 45 6 78
All OK Cancel
Opening and selecting from selection fields

Excitation: 5V 1V 2.5V 5V
Example:
Excitation:
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. When you press the confirmation key to select your set-up and confirm with Use the cursor keys such fields are identified with a downward pointing arrow .
the selection field opens.
. In the documentation (but not in the display)
NOTE
Doubleclick to edit the Unit selection field in the Transducer setup window. Then, you can enter ).
up to four characters (e.g. min1, with 1 representing an individual character assigned to the button
D-21
Edit fields
You may input numbers or letters in the edit fields. In certain edit fields you can only enter numbers (e.g. Zero value), since it would serve no purpose to enter letters in such cases. Example: a) Edit field without contents
User:
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm your input with Example: b) Edit field with contents
Zero point: 0.000
An edit field with contents can be
directly overwritten partially edited completely deleted with the clear key .
Inputting numbers and letters The keys in the alphanumeric input field are assigned seven ways: 1 number, 3 capital letters, 3 small letters. On the first keystroke a number is displayed; further keystrokes produce letters. When entering letters one after another that are located on the same key, you must press the cursor key For example: entering the letters FE: .
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
4x The minus sign on the
1x
3x
key can also be used as a separator in text boxes.
D-22
The special characters , W, m have been assigned to button
, in addition. , in addition.
The superscript numerals 2, 3, and the special character @ have been assigned to button The superscript numeral 1 has been assigned to button w Buttons Cancel or change... , in addition.
Example:
The selected field is shown in reverse highlight. Confirm with . The button label is followed by three dots (change...) and a new set-up window is displayed when confirmation is given.
E-1
Measure
E-2
Measure General Notes
E-3
General notes
This chapter shows you the steps involved in taking a measurement with the MGCplus. At the beginning of each section an example explains the details specific to each transducer with regard to adapting the amplifier plug-in modules. Once the amplifier plug-in modules are matched you can proceed with taking measurements. For information on other functions such as limit switches or peak value stores, see chapter F Additional functions. Steps in setting up the measurement chain 1 2 3 4 Settings specific to the transducer: bridge type, excitation voltage, sensitivity, k-factor. Settings for conditioning: zero balance, zero offset, tare value, filter settings. Settings specific to the display: unit, decimal places, scale range, step. Settings for analogue output: gross, net, peak value, output characteristics. You can set up the zero point and measuring range in two ways, depending on the requirement: a) by inputting the given transducer characteristics b) by calibration with direct loading
E-4
Measure Setting up the amplifier
Basic measurement channel set-up
The Amplifier pull-up menu is adapted to the signal flow of a measurement chain and is used to balance the whole system. Basic unit (e.g. mV/V)
Analogue output Amplifier
Transducer
(V)
Display
(User-specific unit e.g. kg)
The following basic steps are needed to set up a measurement channel: 1. Select set-up mode with shift key .
TRANSDUCER
CHANNEL1
2. If necessary: Set up the language you want for the menus in the system set-up (see chapter H; System Language) 3. Settings specific to the transducer: Bridge type and excitation voltage
Type SG full bridge 5V Excitation kg Unit: mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Zero pt: 2.0000 ... Nom. val.: 50.0000 ... measure... K-Factor:
3
measure
Unit Characteristics (zero point and nominal value) 4. Adjust amplifier Having carried out these steps you will have completed the most essential settings and adjustments, and will be able to carry out simple measurements. The following steps are optional.
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
E-5
CONDITIONING
CHANNEL1
0.0000 ... V Zero reference: >0< 0.0000 ... V Zero offset: >T< 0.0000 ... V Tare: Disable zeroing: 3 Disable taring: 3 Bessel V Low pass 100 Hz High pass Off
5. Settings for conditioning: Zero balance (zero offset) Tare Filter
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
kg Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 50.000 kg 50.000 kg to Step 1
6. Setting up the display format Unit Decimal places Display range Step
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo1: Gross Output Vo2: Net Output characteristics ppm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ...
7. Setting up analogue outputs Gross/Net/Peak value Output characteristics 8. Setting up additional functions (if necessary) Limit switches, Peak values Remote contacts, ...
E-6
2.1
Adaptation to the transducer
TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.:

SG full bridge 5V kg 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
Type Selection field for the transducer types which can be attached. The selection depends on the type of amplifier and connection board.
mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
measure
Excitation Selection field for available excitation voltages (not available with all amplifier types). The selection depends on the type of amplifier and connection board. You will find more hints in later chapters. Unit Selection field for the physical unit. The basic unit mV/V cannot be changed. Zero pt. Edit field for entering the zero point. The lefthand field refers to the physical unit and the righthand field to the basic unit. By activating the button labelled measure you can measure the current zero signal. The value in mV/V is then displayed in the righthand edit field. Nom.val. Edit fields for the nominal value. The lefthand field refers to the physical unit and the righthand field to the basic unit (you can find this nominal value on the identification plate for the transducer).
measure...
measure... K-Factor:
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
Button for opening the Two point calibration set-up window, in which you can measure the characteristic points 1 and 2.
Adjust amplifier
Button for matching the amplifier to the inputs of zero point and nominal value.
E-7
2.1.1
Extended functions of the ML38B
TRANSDUCER Type Excitation Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.:

CHANNEL1
Ex.Ftn... mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
Nominal value Enter the rated value. The value can be found in the table for linear interpolation comparison (in the calibration certificate); if this is not available, enter the value for the maximum calibration stage with the corresponding arithmetic mean in electric units.
measure
measure... Kfactor:
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
NOTE
These values used for the rated value must not be changed after entering the coefficient of the polynomial curve!
Ex. Ftn...
Polynomial curve Active Coeffizients A0: A1: A2: A3:

0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ...
Standardized C0: C1: C2: C3:

0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ...
Aktive Press the confirm key to activate the curve (a checkmark will appear in the activate field) Coefficients/Standardized The cubic polynomial curve is used to correct the signal of the transducer (in mV/V). The measured values are thereby adapted to the actual curve of the transducers. To do this, enter the coefficients A0, A1, A2 and A3 of the third order polynomial, which is described by the following equation: YPh = A3@Yel3 + A2@Yel2 + A1@Yel + A0
YPh: Display in physical units with polynomial curve Yel: Measured value in electric units
OK
Cancel
The coefficient values can be found in the transducer calibration certificate.
E-8
The amplifier itself requires standardized coefficients (C0C3) for value 1, the coefficients from the calibration certificate (A0A3) are automatically converted before being transferred to the amplifier (also in the MGCplus assistant). Conversion: C + A @
Rated value electrical unit (right input field) Rated value physical unit (left input field)
Example: Enter the coefficients from a Force DKD calibration certificate from HBM. The following equivalencies apply:
DKD calibration certificate T S R Polynomial equation A1 A2 A3
ATTENTION
During calibration, the measured values must be entered as the electric unit (mV/V) without changing the read-out!
E-9
2.2
TEDS transducer
F-keys-level 1
1ML30B
Gross Channel
measure
> 0 <
> T <
II
F-keys-level 2
Acal TEDS Unit ...
TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) is the designation for an electronic data sheet in the transducer. It is stored in an electronic module that is inseparably connected to the transducer. It can be located in the transducer housing, in the inseparable cable or connector plug. Many components in the MGCplus amplifier system are capable of reading the transducer information stored in the data sheet and to convert it into amplifier settings so that measurements can be started immediately. MGCplus supports TEDS-transducers that comply with the data protocol (One-Wire-Protocol) and data structure in the IEEE 1451.4 standard. This means that the same cables can be used as for transducers that do not have TEDS. Some MGCplus system connection plates, e.g. AP01i, also offer the possibility of inputting TEDS data signals to two separate pins (ground and TEDs data signal). Loading TEDS data into the amplifier In the default setting, the TEDS key F2 is in level 2 of the function keys. 1. Press it in measuring mode 2. Press the TEDS-key . .
The actual amplifier will then be parameterised with the transducer settings from the TEDS chip if it supports this functionality.
E-10
TEDS supports the following combinations of single-channel amplifiers with corresponding connection plates as per IEEE 1451.4. All single-channel amplifier MLxxB are suitable for TEDS, however they must be equipped with up to date firmware. This firmware and the corresponding firmware download program can be downloaded free of charge from the HBM homepage (www.hbm.com/support/downloads).
ML01B
TEDS
ML10B
nR
ML30B
ML35B
ML38B
ML50B
ML55B ML55BS6
ML60B
AP01i
1,4,5,B1
TEDS
nR
1,4,5,B1
AP03i
1,4,5,B1
1,4,5,B1
T3...T10
AP07/1
min1 T4WA
AP08 AP09
TEDS
nR
AP11i
1,4,5,B1
T3...T10
nR
1,4,5,B1
T3...T10
AP12
1,4,5,B1
TEDS
nR
1,4,5,B1
min1 T4WA
AP13i
1,4,5,B1
1,4,5,B1
AP14 AP17 AP18i

TEDS
T10F(S)
E-11
The following amplifier connection plate combinations are TEDS capable for multi-channel amplifiers. ML801B AP401
TEDS
ML455
ML460
AP402i (1) AP409
TEDS TEDS TEDS TEDS TEDS TEDS TEDS
AP418i
AP455i
AP455iS6
AP460i AP801
AP801S6
AP809 AP810i (2) AP814Bi
AP815i
AP835 AP836i (2)

(1) (2) available from December 2005 available from October 2005 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
E-12
Legends
SG (resistance)-full bridge Voltage
Thermo-resistors PT100, PT 1000 Thermocouples
SG (resistance)-half bridge
Current
min1
SG (resistance)-quarter bridge Inductive half bridge

T3...T10
Passive piezo-electric transducer Current-fed piezo-electric transducer Torque/speed T3..., T10 Torque T1, T4, T5, TB1
T4WA
T4WA speed Pulse counter/frequency Potentiometer 200 5000 LVDT
Inductive full bridge

nR
1,4,5,B1
Piezoresistive transducer
E-13
2.3
Signal conditioning
CONDITIONING
CHANNEL1
Zero reference Amount by which the relative zero point is offset in relation to the absolute zero. Example: A displacement transducer (nominal displacement 20 mm) is intended to be measured from an engine seating and is fastened at a height of 1 m above. The display is intended to show the displacement as an absolute value.
Displacement transducer
0.0000 ... V Zero reference: >0< 0.0000 ... V Zero offset: >T< 0.0000 ... V Tare: 3 Disable zeroing: Disable taring: 3 Bessel V Low pass 100 Hz High pass Off
20mm
CONDITIONING CHANNEL1
Relative zero point Zero reference=1000mm
1000.00 mm Zero reference: 0.0000 ... mm >0< Zero offset: 0.0000 ... mm >T< Tare: Disable zeroing: 3 Disable taring: 3 Bessel V Low pass 100 Hz High pass Off

Engine seating
Absolute zero point
Zero offset By activating the button labelled >0< you trigger zero balancing. If the value of the zero offset is known, you can input it directly in the edit field. Zero balancing affects how the gross value is displayed. Tare By activating the button labelled >T< you trigger taring. If the tare value is known, you can input it directly in the edit field. Taring affects how the gross value is displayed.
E-14
Disable zero/Disable tare You can disable Zero Balance and/or Taring. Disabling applies to all triggering mechanisms (F-keys, remote contacts, software). The following brief example will make clear the difference between zero balancing and taring:
Container Platform
A platform which stands on three load cells is to be used for weighing a container. Two different components are tipped into the container one after the other, and the weight of each is to be displayed (net). The table shows the status before and after zero balancing and taring are triggered.
Load cells Action Platform 55 kg Container 6 kg Component 1 7 kg Component 2 8 kg

>0< >0<
Set-up window Zero offset 55 kg 61 kg 61 kg 61 kg Tare 0 0 7 kg 15 kg Gross before 55 kg after 0 kg before 6 kg after 0 kg before 7 kg after 7 kg
Display Net before 55 kg after 0 kg before 6 kg after 0 kg before 7 kg after 0 kg 8 kg (component 2 only)
>T<
15 kg (total contents of container)
E-15
Impulse response
Low pass Low-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted high-frequency interference above a defined cut-off frequency. Amplitude response, phase delay and impulse response are dependent on the filter characteristics. You can choose between the Butterworth characteristic and the Bessel characteristic. The Butterworth characteristic exhibits a linear amplitude response which then falls away steeply above the cut-off frequency. There is an overshoot of approx. 10 %. The Bessel characteristic exhibits an impulse response with very little (<1 %) or no overshooting. The amplitude response falls away less steeply. High pass High-pass filters are used to suppress unwanted low-frequency interference below a defined cut-off frequency. You can use high-pass to suppress slow fluctuations such as those due to the influence of temperature and drift over time. The high-pass filter has no function when connected to resistance thermometers and thermocouples.
Impulse response
NOTE
In order for high-pass to function, the low-pass setting must not fall below the following limits: Bessel: Butterworth: 5 Hz 10 Hz
E-16
2.4
Display
Unit3 Selecting the required unit for the display. You may choose between the basic unit (mV/V), the user-specific unit (e.g. kg) and the unit for analogue output (V). The associated measured value is then displayed. You can achieve the same effect with the function Unit (factory settings: F3/level 2; see also page G-23). Abs If the absolute display is activated ( 3 ), the display shows the signal at the amplifier input without any conditioning (such as zero offset or taring). Decimal places Number of decimal places. Display range Display range in the selected unit (automatically displayed). Step The step defines the size of the display increments. It refers to the last decimal place in the nominal value.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
V 3 Abs Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 10.000 V 10.000 V to Step 100
Example: Nominal value 20 kg

Decimal places 1 (20.0 kg) Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 g Decimal places 3 (20.000 kg) Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 g Step 5 means the display is in steps of 5 g
E-17
2.5
Analogue outputs (one-channel modules only)
Output VO1 Select signal for analogue output 1 (BNC female connector front panel).
System Display Amplifier Options
Output VO2 Select signal for analogue output 2 (female connector Bu2 back of the device).
Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch
Output characteristics The edit fields for calibration points 1 and 2 are automatically updated as soon as you go to the Transducer input window and activate the . However, you can also change the button labelled Adjust amplifier characteristics of the analogue output by direct input.
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo1: Gross Output Vo2: Net Output characteristics ppm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ...
User-specific unit (e.g. ppm)
Pnt.2
Gross Net Store1 Store2 OFF
Pnt.1 Analogue output (V)
E-18
Example: Minimum set-up for first measurement
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
The transducer is a load cell with the following nominal data: Nominal load 50 kg Nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V
1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (see D-15). 2. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode. , use the cursor keys . to select
or
3. Press the function key

CHANNEL1
Transducer and confirm with

mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
4. Use the cursor keys

measure
to select Strain gage full bridge and
confirm with
. and
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
5. Use to go to the Excitation selection field, press select 5V. 6. Confirm with 7. Use .
to go to the Unit selection field. Press .
. Select the unit
kg and confirm with 8. Use
to go to the Zero pt. edit field and enter the value 0 in .
the lefthand edit field. Confirm with
E-19
9. Unload the load cell. 10. Use to go to the button labelled measure... and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of Zero pt.) 11. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
to go to the Nom.val. edit field and enter the value 50. .
Confirm with 12. Use
to go to the righthand edit field (column mV/V) and enter .

Adjust amplifier
the value 2. Confirm with 13. Use with
to select the button labelled .
and confirm

CHANNEL1
14. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with
mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
and confirm
measure
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
E-20
Measure Adaptation to the transducer
3 3.1
Adaptation to the transducer SG transducer
SG transducers (HBM load cells, force transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics:
The transducer has the following characteristic data: Nominal load (e.g. 20kg) Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 2mV/V) These values must be taken into account during adaptation to the amplifier. The standard set-up for excitation voltage UB in the case of an SG full bridge is 5V. If higher measuring ranges are required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected. The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used.
Amplifier ML10B ML30B ML38B ML55B Limits of the measuring range (mV/V) UB=5 V 0.2...6.12 0.1...3.06 0.2...5.1 0.1...3.06 UB=2.5 V 0.4...12.24 0.2...6.12 0.4...10.2 0.2...6.12 UB=1 V 1.0...30.6 0.5...15.3 0.5...15.3
they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency or DC voltage) they are SG full bridges
With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on the setting.
NOTE
The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output settings.
E-21
3.1.1 Direct input of transducer characteristics
The following example explains the settings: Load cell with the following characteristics: nominal load 20 kg, excitation voltage 5 V, nominal sensitivity 2 mV/V
Measurement is to be to a maximum of 10 kg, i.e. the display range for the amplifier is 10.00 kg (displayed to 2 decimal places). A value of 10 V is to be generated at the analogue output for a 10 kg load. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 2. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode. . . ). or

CHANNEL1
3. Press function key
mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with

measure
5. Use
to select SG full bridge and confirm with
. and
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
to go to the Excitation selection field, press 6. Use select 5V. 7. Confirm with 8. Use .
to switch to the Unit selection field and press .
. Select
the unit kg and confirm with 9. Use
E-22
10. Unload the load cell. 11. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of Zero pt.) 12. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
13. Enter the value 2 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field (below the unit mV/V). 14. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
. If you wish to make no further changes to the display
and output characteristics, you may continue with point 24. .

DISPLAY CHANNEL1
kg Unit Decimal places 2 ... Display range from 20.000 kg 20.000 kg to Step 1
15. Use
to return to the pull-up menu. .
16. Select Display from the pull-up menu and confirm with
17. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal places edit field and confirm with .
18. Select the value 2 from the Step*) selection field and confirm with .
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 kg Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 g Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 g Input 10.000 kg Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 g Step 1 means the display is in steps of 5 g
E-23
19. Use
to return to the pull-up menu.
20. Select Analogue outputs from the pull-up menu and confirm with
. 21. Select the required signal from the Output Vo1 selection field and
confirm with
22. Select the required signal from the Output Vo2 selection field and confirm with .
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
23. Use to go to the Output characteristics Point 2 edit field, and enter the required value (left for the display, right for the analogue output). Confirm with . and confirm
Output Vo1: Gross Output Vo2: Net Output characteristics kg V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 10.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
24. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with .
E-24
3.1.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer
By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined loading occurs.
Example: A 4 kg calibration weight is used for calibrating a 10 kg load cell.
NOTE
If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit points 110. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys or ).

CHANNEL1
by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 2. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode.
mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
measure
3. Press
. .
3
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select SG full bridge and confirm with . and
Two point calibration

kg 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 4.0000
OK
mV/V 0.0021 0.8032

Cancel
Shunt off Measure Measure
6. Use to go to the Excitation selection field, press select 5 V. 7. Confirm with 8. Use .
. Select
the unit kg and confirm with
E-25
9. Use
the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 10. Use
to go to the Nom.val. edit field and enter the value 10 in .

Adjust amplifier
the lefthand edit field. Confirm with 11. Use with to select the button labelled .
and confirm
12. Use the cursor keys and confirm with .
to select the button labelled
measure...
13. Unload the transducer. 14. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand edit field of calibration 1st pt. and confirm with 15. Use cursor key .
Measure
in the 1st
pt. line and confirm with 16. Use cursor key
to select the lefthand edit field from the 2nd pt. .
line, enter the value 4 and confirm with
17. Load the transducer with the 4kg calibration weight. 18. Use cursor key to select key symbol
Measure
from the 2nd pt.
line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure button.
E-26
19. Use cursor key to select the OK button and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10kg; the calibration data for 4kg stays unchanged). 20. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
Measure Strain gages
E-27
3.2
Strain gages
The variable to which reference is to be made for assessment of the material loading is the mechanical stress to which the material is exposed. A practical method for experimental determination of material stresses is based on strain gages. A detailed description of the strain gage technique may be found in the book An Introduction to the Technique of Measuring with Strain Gauges (Author: Karl Hoffmann, published by HBM Darmstadt). The resistance of the SG is changed by straining. This change lies in the mW and mW range, which is why the Wheatstone bridge is used for measuring with great accuracy.
e1
e4
UA +k @e 4 UB
UB UB = bridge excitation voltage
e2
e3
UA = bridge output voltage

ML10B ML30B ML55B
UA
UA + relative change of excitation voltage UB total strain e = e1e2+e3e4 k = gage sensitivity (k-factor)
Fig.3.1:
Wheatstone bridge
E-28
With the MGCplus measurement system you can measure the strain of one strain gage or the total strain of several strain gages. The possible bridge circuits and the necessary device configuration are combined in the following table:
bridge type Quarter bridge Number of active SGs 1 total strain e Connection board AP14 Amplifier ML10B, ML30B, ML55B
e
Half bridge 2 e = e1e2 AP01i, AP03i, AP11i, AP13i, AP14 ML10B, ML55B ML30B (with AP14 only)
e1 e2
4 Full bridge e = e1e2+e3e4 AP01i, AP03i, AP11i, AP13i, AP14
ML10B, ML30B, ML55B, ML38B1)
e1 e2
1)
e4 e3
In connection with AP01i and AP03i
The measurement system always measures the total strain (e) of the individual strain gages in the Wheatstone bridge. In practice individual strain gages are generally used for mechanical stress analysis. Due to the temperature compensation, the larger measuring signal, better cable resistance compensation and in some tension states the half bridge and the full bridge are used (e.g. for measuring on a bent rod). The most important characteristic of an SG is the k-factor (strain sensitivity). The MGCplus measurement system automatically switches over to strain measurement when a k-factor >0 is input. Scaling of the zero point and measuring range is carried out in mm/m. By changing the unit and input range, other physical variables (e.g. mechanical stress in N/mm2) can be derived. If zero is entered as the k-factor the system switches over to mV/V. Example: A strain of up to 1000 mm/m is to be measured with 120 W single strain gages. The k-factor of the SG is 2.05. The excitation voltage plays no part in this example. The setup for 2.5 V will be described.
E-29
1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2
or ).
2. Use the shift key

to return to set-up mode.
3. Press
. .
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Select Type in the pop-up menu. 6. From the type selection field, select SG-1/4-Bridge 120 Ohm 4-wire and from the excitation selection field select 2.5 V. 7. Use
measure
CHANNEL1
SG1/4Bridge 120Ohm 4-wire 2.5V % 0.0000 ... 100.000 ...
to select the K-Factor edit field and enter the value .
m/m
0.0000 ... 1000.000 ...
2.05. Press the confirmation key
3
Adjust amplifier
2.0500 ...
Since the amplifier automatically changes the native unit from mV/V into m/m once the k-factor is input, the physical unit plays no role in this example. The menu window shown here is based on the display using factory settings. 8. Use to go to the righthand Zero pt. edit field and enter the .
value 0. Confirm with 9. Use
to go to the righthand Nom.val. edit field and enter the .

Adjust amplifier
value 1000. Confirm with 10. Use with
and confirm
E-30
11. Press
. . .
13. Select m/m from the selection field Unit and confirm with
14. Use
to go to the Abs activation field and disable the absolute .
display with the aid of
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
16. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and confirm with .
m/m Unit Abs Decimal places 1 ... Display range from 1000.000 m/m 1000.000 m/m to Step 1
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 1000.0 m/m Step 1 means the display is in steps of 100 nm/m Step 5 means the display is in steps of 500 nm/m Input 10.000 m/m Step 1 means the display is in steps of 1 nm/m Step 5 means the display is in steps of 5 nm/m 17. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . in and confirm
18. Carry out a zero balance in no-load status (function key factory settings).
Measure Inductive transducers
E-31
3.3
Inductive transducers
Inductive transducers (HBM displacement transducers) are passive transducers with the following characteristics:
The transducer has the following characteristic data: Nominal displacement (e.g. 20 mm) Nominal sensitivity (e.g. 10 mV/V) The standard set-up for the excitation voltage UB in the case of inductive transducers is 2.5V. If higher measuring ranges are required or if several transducers are connected in parallel, a lower excitation voltage must me selected. The individual values depend on the type of plug-in module used.
Amplifier ML50B ML51B ML55B 0.1...3.06 1.5...45.9 Limits of the measuring range (mV/V) UB=5V UB=2.5V 6.0...183.6 3.0...91.8 UB=1V 15.0...459.0 0.5...15.3 7.5...229.5
they must be fed with an excitation voltage (carrier frequency) they are inductive half bridges
With these measuring range limits, a voltage of 1 V to 10 V can be generated at the analogue output, depending on the setting.
NOTE
The specified full scale values are peak values and cannot be affected by adjusting the analogue output settings.
E-32
The following example explains the settings for a displacement transducer with the following characteristics:
Nominal displacement 20 mm, excitation voltage 2.5 V, nominal value 10 mV/V. The display range from 15 mm shall correspond to an output of 10 V. 1. Select the channel you want using the channel selection keys by directly inputting the channel you want (for example 3.2 2. Use to return to set-up mode. . . ). or

IND half bridge 2.5V mm 0.0000 ... 20.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select IND half bridge and confirm with . and
mV/V
0.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
measure
6. Use to go to the Excitation selection field, press select 2.5 V. 7. Confirm with 8. Use .
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
. Select
the unit mm and confirm with 9. Use
10. Position the transducer in the zero position.
E-33
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
11. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of Zero pt.) 12. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 13. Enter the value 10 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field (below the unit mV/V). 14. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
. If you wish to make no further changes to the display, you
may continue with point 20. . 15. Use to return to the pull-up menu. .
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
16. Select Display from the pull-up menu and confirm with places edit field and confirm with confirm with . .
mm Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 20.000 mm 20.000 mm to Step 1
17. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal 18. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 mm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 mm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 mm Input 10.000 kg Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 mm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 mm 19. Use to return to the pull-up menu. and confirm
E-34
3.3.2 Calibrating the characteristic curve of the transducer
By transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined displacement occurs
Example: A displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of 20 mm (nominal value 10 mV/V) is set with a gauging block of 10 mm, but the measuring range should be 15 mm.
NOTE
If zero point and nominal sensitivity are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.12.. 1. Position the transducer in the zero position.

CHANNEL1
2. Use
or by directly inputting the channel you want ).
(for example 3.2

measure
mV/V
0.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
3. Use 4. Press
to return to set-up mode. . .
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
5. Select Transducer from the pop-up menu and confirm with to go to the Excitation selection field, press 6. Use select 2.5 V. and

mm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 10.000
OK
7. Confirm with
mV/V
. . Select
8. Use
0.0021 5.1032
Cancel
E-35
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
10. Use to go to the button labelled measure and confirm with (the measured value is displayed in the righthand edit field of Zero pt.) 11. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field (below the unit mm) and confirm with .
Adjust amplifier
12. Use with
and confirm
13. Use the cursor keys and confirm with .
measure...

CHANNEL1
14. Position the transducer in the zero position. 15. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with . to select the button labelled .
Measure
mV/V
0.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
16. Use cursor key

measure
in the 1st
pt. line and confirm with 17. Use cursor key
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
to select the lefthand edit field from the 2nd pt. .
line, enter the value 10 and confirm with
18. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement transducer.
mm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 10.000
OK
19. Use cursor key

mV/V
to select key symbol
Measure
from the
0.0021 5.1032
Cancel
2nd pt. line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure button.
E-36
20. Use to select the OK button and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 20mm; the calibration data for 10mm stays unchanged).
21. Use .
22. Select Analogue outputs from the pull-up menu and confirm with
23. Select the gross signal from the Output Vo1 selection field and confirm with confirm with . . 24. Select the required signal from the Output Vo2 selection field and
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
CHANNEL1
Output Vo1: Gross Ouput Vo2: Net Output characteristics mm V Point 1: 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2: 15.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
to go to the Output characteristics Pnt.2 edit field, and 25. Use enter the required value (15 on the left for the display, 10 on the right for the analogue output). Confirm with . and confirm
Measure Torque transducers
E-37
3.4
Torque transducer
Torque transducers with different measurement principles require different amplifier modules in the MGCplus-system and therefore different operating steps. The HBM torque transducers in the type series TB1A and TB2 work with SG full bridges. The procedure described in Section 3.1 (SG transducer) must be followed to adapt the torque channels (ML10B, ML30B, ML38, ML55B) of these transducers. The adaptation of the speed channels (ML60B/ML460) corresponds to the procedure described in this chapter. The HBM-torque transducers in type series T3_FNA and T10FKF1 work with a frequency modulation procedure (TF ca. 10kHz corresponds to unloaded shaft, modulation through load "5kHz). You will need the connection plates AP07 or AP07/1 for processing measured values. The HBM-torque flanges in type series T10F/T10FSSF1/SU2 and T10FM require connection plate AP17 for operation with the amplifier modules ML60B (one amplifier module each for torque and speed). When using the amplifier modules ML460 (multi-channel module) with the connection plates AP6401, the T10.. transducers must be powered externally. For calculating additional parameters, such as the rotation output (product of speed and torque), the freely programmable module ML70B is recommended for MGCplus. Another option is the use of online calculation channels in the HBM measured data recording software catman.
E-38
TRANSDUCER Type: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.:

Freq.0..20kHz Direct Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
Special features of the ML460/AP460i: The Transducer setup menu is expanded to include the PWM and Duration types. When inductive rotation speed transducers are connected (T-R coils) select from the setup menu Type: Freq. 0 ...x kHz and Link: Integrating.
Ext.fct... kHz
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
Freq.0..2kHz Freq.0..20kHz Freq.0..200kHz Freq.0..500kHz Pulse counter PWM Duration
PWM (pulse width modulation) THigh When pulse width modulation is in use, the ratio of the pulse duration (THigh) to the time interval (T) is evaluated (duty ratio). The measuring range is 0 % ... 100 % duty ratio. Duration When pulse duration is in use only the absolute pulse duration (THigh) is evaluated. The measuring range is 0 ... 2500 ms. T
E-39
3.4.1 Direct input of torque characteristics
The following example explains the procedures for setting up the torque, rotation-speed and performance channels (valid for the T3_FNA type series):
Nominal torque of the shaft: Nominal sensitivity: Calibration characteristics: Nominal speed: Rotation speed range to be displayed for the application: Display range for performance: 1. Use
50 Nm 5 kHz 24.22 Nm 3000 rpm 2000 rpm 10 kW

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1 Ext.fct... kHz

10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
(for example 3.2 2. Use
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use 6. Use to select Freq.0..20 kHz and confirm with to go to the Excitation selection field, press . . and
select 5 V. Confirm with 7. Use
. Select
the unit Nm and confirm with
8. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand Zero pt. edit field. 9. Enter the value 10 in the righthand Zero pt. edit field (or if the transducer is not under load, activate the button labelled measure ).
E-40
10. Enter the value 50 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 11. Enter the value 5 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field.
12. Use with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
may continue with point 17. .

13. Use
15. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal

DISPLAY CHANNEL1
places edit field and confirm with
Nm Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 50.000 Nm 50.000 Nm to Step 1
16. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . and confirm
*)NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 50.0 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 Nm Input 50.000 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 Nm
E-41
3.4.2 Measuring with the built-in shunt
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
NOTE
If zero point and nominal torque are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.9..
1. Use
(for example 3.2 2. Use

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with

kHz measure
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
5. Use 6. Use
to select Freq.0..20kHz and confirm with to go to the Excitation selection field, press .
. and
measure...
Adjust amplifier
select 5V. Confirm with 7. Use

Nm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 24.220
OK
. Select

kHz
Shunt on Measure Measure
10.056 2.4210
Cancel
8. Enter the value 50 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field.
E-42
9. Use 10. Use .
to select the Adjust amplifier button and confirm with to select the button labelled
measure...
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
and confirm with
11. Unload the transducer.

12. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 13. Use cursor key . to select the button labelled . and
Measure
in the 1st
pt. line and confirm with

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
14. Use
kHz
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
to go to the Shunt off selection field, press .
select Shunt on. Confirm with

measure
15. Use
to select key symbol
Measure
from the 2nd pt. line. If you
measure...
Adjust amplifier
now press , measurement starts and the present value in kHz is displayed on the left next to the Measure key symbol. 16. Use to select the lefthand edit field in the 2nd pt. line. Enter
the calibration characteristics 24.22 and confirm with

Nm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 24.220
OK
kHz 0.0000 2.4210

Cancel
Shunt on Measure Measure
17. Use to select the key symbol OK and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 50 Nm; the calibration data for 25 Nm stays unchanged). 18. Select Display from the pull-up menu and confirm with .
E-43
20. Go to the Step selection field, choose the required step and confirm with .
*)NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 50.0 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 Nm Input 50.000 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 Nm 21. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
E-44
Extended functions setup window for ML60B: Glitch filter

If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6 ms will be suppressed. LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure). LIV1 switch output states
TRANSDUCER Typ: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom. val.:

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
Ext.fct... kHz
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
F1 1.6 ms
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active
F1 Counter signal to LIV1 Off
Counter signal to LIV1
LIV1 switch output: LIV2 switch output: OK
Cancel
Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to LIV2
All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default settings).
Off F1 to GW1 F1 Counter signal to GW1
E-45
3.5
Adapting the rotation-speed channel
The following calculation is needed for setting up the speed channel: Nominal speed: nA = 3000 rpm Number of impulses/revolution: i = 30 (see table below, type T30FNA) nA x i + Impulse frequency 60 In this example: 3000 x 30 = 1500 Hz 60 i.e. a frequency of up to 1500Hz is to be measured.
Torque transducer T4WA T30FNA T32FNA T34FNA T10F
*)
Number of impulses per revolution (two outputs shifted by 90o) 90 30 15 15 15...720*)
See T10F documentation.
E-46
1. Use
or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . .
3.2

4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select Freq.0..2 kHz and confirm with to go to the Excitation selection field, press . . and

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
6. Use
Ext.fct... kHz
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
select 5 V. Confirm with 7. Use
measure
. Select
measure...
Adjust amplifier
the unit rpm and confirm with
Extended functions Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active LIV1 switch output: LIV2 switch output: OK
Off Off
8. Enter the value 0 in the Zero pt. edit field (lefthand column rpm and righthand column kHz). 9. Enter the value 3000 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 10. Enter the value 1.5 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field. 11. Use to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
Cancel
with
E-47
12. Use
15. Go to the Step selection field, choose the required step and confirm with .
*)NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 1000.0 rpm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 rpm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 rpm Input 1000.000 rpm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 rpm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 rpm 16. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
E-48
Extended functions setup window for ML60B: Glitch-Filter

If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6 ms will be suppressed. LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1 (see figure). LIV1 switch output states

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 50.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
Ext.fct... kHz
10.0000 ... 5.0000 ...
F1 1 . 6 m s
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
Glitch Filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transd. error input active
F1 Counter signal to LIV1 Off
Counter signal to LIV1
LIV1 switch output: LIV2 switch output: OK
Cancel
Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to GW2
All extended functions that have not been mentioned here are insignificant for torque measurements and must be deactivated (default settings).
Off F1 to LIV1 F1 Counter signal to LIV1
Measure Thermocouples
E-49
3.6
Thermocouples
Thermocouples are active transducers. For measurements using thermocouples you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module and the AP09 connection board. The AP09 has a built-in reference temperature measuring point. The amplifier plug-in module carries out cold-spot compensation and linearisation for type J, T, K and S thermocouples. With the Thermocouples operating mode and units C or F selected, the temperature will be displayed appropriately in the required unit. With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance with the output voltage1). The following example explains the settings:
Display (C)
Type K thermocouple, the temperature is to be displayed in C , with a temperature of 50C corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The temperature of 70C corresponds to an output signal of +10 V. Upon switching to another thermocouple type, the values for the following functions are reset to their default values: Cut-off frequency; limit switches; peak values; unit of measure; zero balance
70 50
Nom.val.
10
Amplifier Output signal (V)
10
1)
If you wish to measure the output voltage of the thermocouple directly (without linearisation and cold-spot compensation), you must set up under 75 mV operating mode.
E-50
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select Thermocpl.K and confirm with .

Thermocpl.K
CHANNEL1
6. Use
. Select
no C
50.0000 ... 20.0000 ...
the unit C and confirm with

C
50.0000 ... 20.0000 ...
measure
7. Enter the value 50 in the lefthand Zero pt. edit field. 8. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field (70C50C=20C). 9. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
measure...
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-51
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0C Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1C Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5C Input 50.000C Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001C Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005C 14. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
E-52
Measure Current and voltage measurement
3.7
Current and voltage measurement
To measure current signals and voltage signals you need the ML01B amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multichannel module with the AP801 connection board. The following example explains the set-ups: A torque transducer with integral amplifier delivers a maximum output signal of 3 V, corresponding to a nominal torque of 20 Nm. A display range of 20.000 Nm is to be set up. For control purposes an output signal of 10 V is required.
E-53
3.7.1
Direct input of transducer characteristics
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select 10 V and confirm with .

10V
Channel 1
6. Use
. Select
no
Nm 0.00000 ... 20.0000 ...

Vi 50.0000 ...
3.0000 ...
measure
7. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand Zero pt. edit field. 8. Enter the value 0 in the righthand Zero pt. edit field. 9. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 10. Enter the value 3 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
measure...
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-54
15. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and confirm with
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 Nm Input 10.000 Nm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 Nm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 Nm 16. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
Nm Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 20.000 Nm 20.000 Nm to Step 1
Measure Resistance temperature detectors
E-55
3.8
Resistance temperature detectors
Resistance temperature detectors are passive transducers. For this transducer you need the ML35B one-channel amplifier plug-in module or the ML801B multi-channel module with the AP835 connection board. They carry out automatic linearisation and display the temperature in correct digits. With resistance temperature detector operating mode and unit C or F selected, the corresponding temperature will be displayed in degrees of the required unit. With Volt selected as the unit, scaling is carried out in accordance with the output voltage1). The following example explains the set-ups: Type Pt100 resistance temperature detector, the temperature is to be displayed in C , with a temperature of 50C corresponding to an output signal of 0 V. The output signal at 70C is to be +10 V.
1)
The permissible ranges depend on the bridge excitation voltage. If a measuring range is set up that exceeds the amplifiers adjustment range, the maximum or minimum possible value is adopted.
E-56
3.8.1
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select Pt100 and confirm with .
TRANSDUCER
CHANNEL1
Type: Pt100 Connection: 4-wire C Unit: C 50.0000 ... Zero pt.: 50.0000 ... 20.0000 ... 20.0000 ... Nom.val.: measure... Adjust amplifier
6. Select the required connection mode from the Connection selection field.*) 7. Use to switch to the Unit selection field and press . . Select
measure
the unit C and confirm with
8. Enter the value 50 in the lefthand Zero pt. edit field. 9. Enter the value 20 in the lefthand Nom.val.: edit field (70C50C=20C). 10. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
*)
In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of 500 m.
E-57
13. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal places edit field and confirm with
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0C Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1C Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5C Input 50.000C Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001C Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005C 15. To return to measuring mode, press the shift key the security prompt with . and confirm
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
C Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 30,000 C 30,000 C to Step 1
E-58
Measure Resistors
3.9
Resistors
Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 and 0...5 k). The following example explains the set-ups: Resistance value 400 , Input range 400.00 The input range of 400 corresponds to an output signal of 10 V.
Measure Resistors
E-59
3.9.1
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use
to select 500Ohm (this is the input range of the amplifier) .
TRANSDUCER Type: 500 Ohm Connection: 4-wire Ohm Unit: Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 400.0000 ... measure...
CHANNEL1
and confirm with
Ohm
0.00000 ... 400.0000 ...
6. Select the required connection mode from the Connection selection field.*)
measure
7. Use
. Select
Adjust amplifier
the unit Ohm and confirm with
8. Enter the value 0 in both the Zero pt. edit fields. 9. Enter the value 400 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 10. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
may continue with point 15. . 11. Use

*)
In 4-wire technology, compensation is made for cable resistance up to a length of 500 m.
E-60
Measure Resistors

14. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and
confirm with
NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range.
DISPLAY CHANNEL1
Ohm Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 400.000 Ohm 400.000 Ohm to Step 1
Example: Input 10.0 Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 Input 10.000 Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 15. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with . and confirm the security
Measure Impulse counting
E-61
3.10
Impulse counting
The ML60B amplifier is required for impulse counting purposes. It enables a maximum impulse-sequence frequency of 1 MHz to be processed. For more details on further amplifier setup options refer to chapter 3.4, page E-44. Incremental transducers e.g. for angle measurement deliver two square-wave signals which are 90 out of phase. The clock ratio between High and Low for both signals must be approx. 1:1.
The following example explains the set-ups: An angle of rotation transducer delivers 180 impulses per revolution. These impulses are to be displayed as 360 . Due to the number of impulses per revolution the value 2 is specified as Step, since a higher resolution would make no sense. The levels of the square-wave signal amount to 10 V. A frequency signal with quadrupled counter impulses is required at the output in addition to the measured value.
E-62
1. Use
or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . . .
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select the Impuls counter type and confirm with to go to the Excitation selection field, press . . and
TRANSDUCER Type: Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.:

Impuls counter
CHANNEL1 Ext.fct...
kImp 0.00000 ... 0.18000 ...
6. Use
5V deg
0.00000 ... 360.0000 ...
select 5 V. Confirm with
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
7. Use to switch to the Ext.fct... button and confirm with (For details on the extended functions refer to page E-64). 8. Use
to select the Frequency quadrupling and Evaluate F2 to activate them.
Extended functions
! !
Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transducer error input active
F1 Counting signal to LIV1 Off
signal activation fields and press 9. Use
to change to the LIV1 switch output selection field, select . .
LIV1 switch output : LIV2 switch output : OK
F1 counter signal to LIV1 and confirm with 10. Use to switch to the
OK
Cancel
button and confirm with
E-63
11. Use
to change to the Unit selection field and press .
Select the unit deg and confirm with

12. Enter the value 0 in both the Zero pt. edit fields. 13. Enter the value 360 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field.
14. Enter the value 0.180 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field. 15. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
may continue with point 20.

DISPLAY CHANNEL1
16. Use
deg Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 360.000 deg 360.000 deg to Step 2
18. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal places edit field and confirm with . .
21. Select Value 2 from the Step*) selection field (1 impulse corresponds to 2; 180 impulses/revolution corresponds to 360) and confirm with . and confirm the security
22. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with .
Assign a free F-key to the function Zeroing (factory settings: Level 1/F1). Then return to measuring mode. If you then press the appropriate F-key, the impulse counter is set to 0. See also chap. Assigning F-keys; page G-24. MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
E-64
Extended functions setup window for ML60B: Glitch filter

If this filter has been switched on, interfering signals with pulse widths below 1.6ms will be suppressed. Frequency quadrupling The frequency quadrupling results in an increased signal resolution by counting of both the positive and the negative signal edges. With both frequency inputs (F1 and F2) having been connected, the measuring frequency is quadrupled. If F2 has not been connected,the measuring frequency is doubled. Evaluate F2 signal (recognition of direction) The phaseshifted signal F2 is evaluated thus enabling the direction of rotation or motion to be displayed. Zero index input active With incremental transducers this input is used for resetting the counter in counting mode. Transducer error input active (only with AP01i) If a signal is connected (0V level), the amplifier interprets the measured value as an error (e.g. in the case of a failure of the luminescent source with optical systems). LIV1 switch output The frequency signal F1 or the counter signal can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 1.

Freq.0..20kHz 5V Nm 0.0000 ... 360.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
Ext.fct... kHz
0.0000 ... 0.1800 ...
measure
measure...
Adjust amplifier
Extended functions
! !
Glitch filter (min. pulse width 1.6ms) Frequency quadrupling Evaluate F2 signal Zero index input active Transducer error input active
Off Off
LIV1 switch output : LIV2 switch output : OK
Cancel
Off F2 to LIV2 Direction of rotation to LIV2
LIV2 switch output The frequency signal F2 or the signal for the direction of rotation can be applied to the switching output of limit value switch 2.
Off F1 to LIV1 F1 Counting signal to LIV1
E-65
F1
F2
Counting signal to LIV1 with activated quadruple evaluation
E-66
Measure Piezoelectric transducers
Piezoelectric transducers
Piezoelectric transducers are active transducers that emit a charge in the event of mechanical loading. When using these transducers, please observe the following instructions:
For transducer connection, special cable with high isolation resistance, low capacitance, low noise and a wide temperature range is essential. Standard coaxial cable is unsuitable for this type of application. For quasi-static measurements a very high isolation resistance (>100T ) is required. For this reason all input plugs must be kept clean and should not be touched by hand. Please use a suitable cleaning agent for cleaning (e.g. pure petroleum spirit).
To operate piezoelectric transducers you need the AP08 connection board with the charge amplifier and an ML10B or ML01B DC amplifier. A piezoelectric transducer can be thought of as a capacitor that is charged by mechanical loading. In all cases, discharging is via the input and isolation resistor on the amplifier. The time constant determines the speed of discharge. There are three time constants from which to choose: SHORT MEDIUM LONG for dynamic measurement for dynamic measurement with a limited frequency range for quasi-static measurement
Coarse and fine adjustment can be chosen for the measuring range selection. There are four input ranges for coarse adjustment: 100 pC; 1; 10 and 100 nC. Example: If the measuring range 6000 pC is wanted, set up the next higher input range of 10 nC.
E-67
With a constant transducer loading the value in the display or at the output signal may drift. This may result from insufficient cable isolation resistance or incorrect drift balance on the amplifier. We recommend that all male connectors should first be cleaned. If the problem persists, the drift needs to be readjusted (see chap.4.2). The following example explains the set-ups: You wish to use a piezoelectric acceleration transducer for measurement. Transducer nominal value is 100 pC/g. Dynamic measurement is to be taken, up to 60 g = 10 V. Measuring range 60 g 100 pC/g = 6000 pC Dynamic measurement, i.e. time constant SHORT.
E-68
4.1
Connecting and measuring
1ML10B
Gross Channel
Resetting the charge amplifier (RESET): 1. Assign an F-key (in this case factory setting F2) to the Zero/Cal/Measure function (see page G-23ff). 2. Select screen type 1 value (with status line) (see page G-3ff). 3. Reset the charge amplifier: Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until Zero appears on the status line.
Measure
Measure
AP08
NOTE
Transducer connection (BNC female connector)
When you have just switched the unit on this step is not necessary, since the input is automatically set to zero. 4. Unloading the transducer: Immediately before connecting the transducer, the cable must be short-circuited. a) Connect the centre pin of the BNC male connector for a moment to the connector housing. b) Connect the transducer to the BNC female connector of the AP08. 5. Starting to measure: Now press the F-key assigned under point 1 until Measure appears in the status line. 6. We recommend selecting the ZERO position with the F-key when measurement is not in progress.
E-69
If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up:
Press the Zero/Cal/Measure F-key until Zero appears on the status line. Wait until the display comes to a stop. Press the Zero/Cal/Measure F-key until Measure is displayed.
E-70
1. Use
or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . . .
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to select transducer type < 10 nC and confirm with to go to the Decay time selection field, press . and
TRANSDUCER Type < 10nC Time constant short g Unit: Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 60.0000 ... measure...
CHANNEL1
6. Use
select Short. Confirm with

nC 0.00000 ... 6.00000 ...
measure
7. Use
. Select
Adjust amplifier
the unit g and confirm with
8. Enter the value 0 in both the Zero pt. edit fields. 9. Enter the value 60 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 10. Enter the value 6 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field. 11. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
may continue with point 16. . 12. Use to return to the pull-up menu.
E-71

confirm with
*)NOTE
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
deg Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 360.000 deg 360.000 deg to Step 2
Example: Input 10.0 nC Step width 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 nC Step width 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 nC Input 10.000 nC Step width 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 nC Step width 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 nC 16. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with . and confirm the security
E-72
4.1.2 Setting up the zero point
Zero point is set up in measuring mode with the Measure and Zeroing functions. Time constant Short 1. Press function key (factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until Measure appears in the status line. 2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function Zeroing ( >0< ) (factory setting F1/Level 1). Time constant Medium/Long a few times (factory setting: Measure, 2nd level) until 1. Press Zero is displayed on the status line. 2. Press the function key to which you have assigned the function Zeroing ( >0< ) (factory setting F1/Level 1). 3. Press a few times (Measure, 2nd level) until Measure is displayed on the status line.
E-73
4.1.3 Special case: initial charge is known
In this case zero point setting is omitted for one measurement. 1. Use
or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . . . and
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use 6. Use
nC 0.12000 ... 6.00000 ...
TRANSDUCER Type < 10nC Time constant short g Unit: Zero pt.: 0.00000 ... Nom.val.: 60.0000 ... measure...
CHANNEL1
to select transducer type < 10nC and confirm with to go to the Time constant selection field, press .
measure
select Short. Confirm with 7. Use
Adjust amplifier
. Select
the unit g and confirm with
8. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand Zero pt. edit field. 9. Enter the value of the initial load in the righthand Zero pt. edit field (e.g. 0.12). 10. Use with to select the button labelled . and confirm the security
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-74
4.2
Drift balancing
AP08
The drift will have been balanced at the factory. However, the balancing procedure must be repeated from time to time due to the effects of aging and temperature.
ZERO-potentiometer for setting the drift
Connect the unladen transducer to the amplifier before it is switched on Switch the instrument on and wait 30min.
Set-up mode: Select nC as the unit of measure Set input range and measuring range to <100 pC Set time constant to Long
Measuring mode: Use to select gross signal
Press the Zero/Cal/Measure F-key a few times until Measure is displayed on the status line. Turn the set-up potentiometer (see accompanying figure) until the value stops.
If the error message OVERFLOW occurs during set-up: Press the Zero/Cal/Measure F-key a few times until Zero is displayed on the status line. Wait for the display to come to a stop Press the Zero/Cal/Measure F-key a few times until Measure is displayed on the status line.
Measure Current-fed piezoelectric transducers
E-75
Current-fed piezoelectric transducers
Piezoelectric transducers with a built-in preamplifier are often used for acceleration and force measurement. These transducers need a constant current for the power supply. The measurement signal corresponds to the modulated voltage at the power line. A typical example of this product family is the DeltaTronT acceleration transducer from Brel&Kjaer. To operate current-fed piezoelectric transducers you will need connection board AP18i and an ML10B or ML01B DC amplifier. You can select rough and fine adjustment for the measuring range. 3 input ranges are available for coarse adjustment: 0.1 V; 1 V; 10 V. Example: If you want a measuring range of 7 V the next input range up 10 V is set. The zero point defines the voltage which generates 0 V at the output of the amplifier. The nominal value is always defined relative to this zero point. Analogue outputs are used to define the display scaling, i.e. they are used to define the value that is displayed for an output signal of 10 V. The following example explains the set-ups: An acceleration of up to 300 m/s2 is to be measured with a DeltaTronT transducer. The nominal value of the transducer is 1 mV/ m/s2. Measuring range (fine adjustment): 300 m/s2 x 1 mV/m/s2 = 0.3 V Input range (coarse adjustment): 1 V ( > 0.3 V)
E-76
5.1
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use
to select transducer type Deltatron 1V and confirm with
TRANSDUCER Type Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.:

Deltatron 1V
CHANNEL1
. 6. Use to switch to the Unit selection field and press . . Select
220mA m/s2
0.00000 ... 300.0000 ...
Vi 0.00000 ... 0.30000 ...
measure
the unit m/s2 and confirm with
measure...
Adjust amplifier
7. Enter the value 0 in both the Zero pt. edit fields. 8. Enter the value 300 in the lefthand Nom.val. edit field. 9. Enter the value 0.3 in the righthand Nom.val. edit field. 10. Use with to select the button labelled
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-77

confirm with
*)NOTE
DISPLAY
CHANNEL1
m/s2 Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 300.000 m/s2 300.000 m/s2 to Step 1
Example: Input 10.0 m/s2 Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 m/s2 Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 m/s2 Input 10.000 m/s2 Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 m/s2 Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 m/s2 15. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with . and confirm the security
E-78
Measure Piezoresistive transducers
Piezoresistive transducers
Piezoresistive transducers are passive transducers. The following example explains the set-ups: Pressure transducer with the following characteristics: Rated pressure 300 bar, excitation 10 V, rated sensitivity 200 mV/V, Display range 300 bar, test pressure 250 bar (partial load) Due to the high sensitivity you must use the ML10B amplifier. Zero point and measuring range can be set up directly with the transducer characteristics or by means of a test pressure. Both methods are described below.
E-79
6.1
1. Use
3.2 2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use and confirm with .
TRANSDUCER Type Excitation: Unit: Zero pt.: Nom.val.:

Full bridge high level 10V bar 0.00000 ... 300.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
6. Use
to switch to the Excitation selection field and press .
Select 10V and confirm with

mV/V 0.00000 ... 200.0000 ...
measure
7. Use
. Select
measure...
Adjust amplifier
the unit bar and confirm with
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-80
12. Use
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
14. Specify the required number of decimal places in the Decimal places edit field and confirm with
15. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . and confirm the security
16. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with

DISPLAY CHANNEL1
bar Unit Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 300.000 bar 300.000 bar to Step 1
*)NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 bar Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 bar Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 bar Input 10.000 bar Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 bar Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 bar
E-81
6.1.1
Measuring transducer characteristics
Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined test pressure occurs.
NOTE
If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.10.. 1. Use 3.2 or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . .

CHANNEL1
2. Use 3. Press
mV/V
0.0000 ... 200.000 ...
measure
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to go to the Excitation selection field, press select 10V. 6. Confirm with . and
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...

bar 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 250.000
OK
mV/V 0.0021 166.67

Cancel
7. Use
. Select
the unit bar and confirm with 8. Use
to go to the Nom.val. edit field and enter the value 300 .
in the lefthand edit field. Confirm with
E-82
10. Use with

Adjust amplifier
and confirm
11. Use the cursor keys and confirm with

measure...
12. Unload the transducer. 13. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 14. Use .
Measure
in the 1st pt. line and

CHANNEL1
confirm with 15. Use
to select the lefthand edit field from the 2nd pt. line, enter .
mV/V
0.0000 ... 2.0000 ...
measure
the value 250 and confirm with
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
16. Set up the transducer with the test pressure. 17. Use cursor key to select the button labelled
Measure
from the

bar 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 250.000
OK
Point 2 line. If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure .
mV/V
0.0021 166.67
Cancel
18. Use to select the button labelled OK and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 300 bar; the calibration data for 250 bar stays unchanged). 19. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with . and confirm the security
Measure Potentiometric transducers
E-83
Potentiometric transducers
Resistors are passive transducers. These transducers require the ML35B , amplifier plug-in module, which has two coarse measuring ranges available (0...500 and 0...5 k). Potentiometric transducers are passive transducers that have to be supplied with an excitation voltage. To operate a potentiometric transducer you require the ML10B amplifier. Please note that the maximum resistance value is 5 k. The following example explains the set-ups: A potentiometric displacement transducer with a nominal displacement of 10 mm is used for measurement. The whole nominal displacement is to be used. The display range is 10 mm. Due to the interdependence between excitation voltage and nominal input voltage (mV/V), in the case of an excitation voltage of 2.5 V, the measuring range needs to be set up in accordance with the following correlation: Nominal value to be set up = (RANGE) Rated voltage (displacement) Excitation voltage
Nominal value (range) = 2.5 V / 2.5 V = 1000 mV/V This value of 1000 mV/V or 1 V/V only changes if a potentiometric transducer is used in a section. As the second method, partial calibration with end values of 7 mm is performed for calibration of the zero point and range with a defined displacement.
E-84
7.1
1. Use 3.2
2. Use
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use and confirm with .

Full bridge high level 2.5V mm 0.0000 ... 10.0000 ...
CHANNEL1
6. Use
to switch to the Excitation selection field and press .
Select 2.5 V and confirm with

measure
mV/V
0.0000 ... 1000.000 ...
7. Use
. Select
the unit mm and confirm with
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
Adjust amplifier
and confirm
E-85
15. Go to the Step*) selection field, choose the required step and confirm with . and confirm the security
*)NOTE
The step width refers to the last decimal place of the input range. Example: Input 10.0 mm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.1 mm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.5 mm Input 10,000 mm Step 1 means the display is in steps of 0.001 mm Step 5 means the display is in steps of 0.005 mm
E-86
7.1.1
Measuring transducer characteristics
Transferring the signals produced by the transducer when a defined displacement occurs.
NOTE
If zero point and nominal value are not modified (for instance in the case of recalibration), you may omit point 1.10.. 1. Use 3.2 or by directly inputting the channel you want (for example ). to return to set-up mode. . .

CHANNEL1
2. Use 3. Press
mV/V
0.0000 ... 1000.000 ...
measure
4. Select Transducer from the pull-up menu and confirm with 5. Use to go to the Excitation selection field, press select 2.5 V. 6. Confirm with . and
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...

mm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 7.0000
OK
mV/V 0.0021 699.23

Cancel
7. Use
. Select
to go to the Nom.val. edit field and enter the value 10 in .
E-87
10. Use
to go to the righthand Nom.val.: edit field and enter the .

measure...
value 1000. Confirm with

11. Use .
and confirm with
12. Slide the core into the transducer until zero is displayed. 13. Enter the value 0 in the lefthand edit field of calibration point 1 and confirm with 14. Use .
Measure...
in the 1st pt. line

CHANNEL1
and confirm with 15. Use cursor key
to select the lefthand edit field from the Point .
mV/V
0.0000 ... 1000.000 ...
measure
2 line, enter the value 7 and confirm with
Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
16. Position the gauging block below the probe tip of the displacement transducer. 17. Use to select the button labelled
Measure
from the 2nd pt. line.

mm 1st pt.: 2nd pt.: 0.0000 7.0000
OK
If you now press measurement starts, and the current measured value is displayed in mV/V on the left alongside the Measure .
mV/V
0.0021 699.23
Cancel
18. Use to select the button labelled OK and confirm with (the amplifier converts the nominal value to 10mm; the calibration data for 7mm stays unchanged). 19. To return to measuring mode, press prompt with . and confirm the security
E-88
F-1
Additional functions
F-2
Additional functions Remotes
F-3
1 1.1
Remote (one-channel modules only) Switching on remote control
The remote contacts are used to control important functions of the amplifier by means of digital inputs. These remotes are only active when remote control is switched on.
There are three ways in which you can switch remote control on or off. In measuring mode: Press function key function key (factory setting). . The Switch set-up twice followed by
Remote contacts
Remote contacts Remote control Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8
On
Channel 1 On Off
In set-up mode: press function key
window lets you switch remote control on or off. By means of the remote contacts (with function REMT).
no function no function no function no function no function no function no function no function
No function ACALautocal TARAtare CPV1clear store 1 HLD1hold store 1 CPV2clear store 2 HLD2hold store 2 ZEROzero balance SHNTShunt ON/OFF PRNTselect for printing CALinput to cal. signal ZEROinput to zero signal INVchange sign PSEL1select line param. set 1 PSEL2select line param. set 2 PSEL4select line param. set 4 REMTRemote ON/OFF INTStart/Stop Integration
F-4
1.2
Assigning remote contacts
Remotes can be assigned freely and are not defined in the factory setup. The available functions and a description of each are shown in the following table:
Function ACAL TARA CPV1/2 HLD1/2 ZERO SHNT PRNT CAL ZERO INV PSEL1 PSEL2 PSEL4 REMT INT Level 5 V (Level 0V for AP13i) Autocalibration ON Peak value 1/2 is stored Peak value store 1/2 free Level 0 V (Level 24 V for AP13i) Autocalibration OFF Peak value 1/2 is cleared from current value Contents of peak value store 1/2 frozen
Taring starts on transition 5 V0 V (0 V24 V for AP13i)
Current measuring signal is set to zero on transition 5 V0 V (0 V24 V for AP13i) Shunt off When printing is enabled the channel is taken into account Shunt on When printing is enabled the channel is not taken into account Input is switched to internal calibration source Input is switched to zero signal Polarity is switched over (ML60B only) Parameter set select code line 1(see Table 1.1) Parameter set select code line 2 (see Table 1.1) Parameter set select code line 4 (see Table 1.1) Remote control contacts inactive Remote control contacts active All connection boards (except AP13i): Integration starts at the transition from 5 V 0 V and stops at the transition from 0 V 5 V. Connection boards AP13i: Integration starts at the transition from 0 V 24 V and stops at the transition from 24 V 0 V.
F-5
Parameter set selection

PSEL1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PSEL2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 PSEL4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Parameter set selected 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 1.1
0: Remote contacts not driven; Level 5 V (level 0 V in the case of 13i). 1: Remote contacts driven; Level 0 V; connected to digital ground (level 24 V in the case of 13i).
F-6
Additional functions Limit switches
Limit switches (one-channel modules only)
In order to assess mass or weight tolerances, or when monitoring forces, pressures etc., it is often necessary to comply with certain target values or limit switches. Each amplifier plug-in module therefore has four limit switches available (in ex-factory status these are OFF). They can be used to specify the level, the hysteresis and the direction of each for limit switch monitoring. The hysteresis value prevents fluttering of the limit switches upon reaching the switching threshold. The prevailing connection state is indicated by an LED on the front panel of the amplifier plug-in module when the STATUS display format is enabled. Displays limit switches status Please note the following points when working with limit switches: The measuring signal must last for at least 1 ms. The measurement voltage delivered by the amplifier is compared internally with the reference voltage. If the measurement voltage reaches or exceeds the reference voltage that has been set, the associated logic output is switched and the appropriate LED indicates the connection state. If you are using the AP02 connection board, you also have relay contacts available. Connection board AP13i has 24 V PLCcompatible, optically decoupled limit switch outputs.
F-7
2.1
Activate limit switches
In the ex-factory setting, the limit switches are not enabled (Enable limit switch Off).
1. Use the shift key 2. Press
Limit switches
3. Select Limit switches from the pop-up menu and confirm with 4. Select Yes from the Enable selection field and confirm with .
Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF
Channel 1
1 ... 1-Limit1 ... No Gross 100.000 ... 1,000 ... Over limit Positiv logic define... free 1-Limit1 ON... 1-Limit1 OFF... Normal Normal % %
NOTE
The screen type Status limit switch, which enables the status of limit switches to be displayed, is set up under Screen No. 5 ex-factory (see also chap.1.4, Status limit switch ; page G-21). The limit switches must be enabled in advance (see chap. 2.2; page F-8).
free disabled
No Yes Positive logic Negative logic Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12
Over limit Below limit

Normal Inverse
F-8
2.2
Setting up limit switches
Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF
Channel 1
1 ... 1-Limit1 ... No Gross 100.000 ... 1,000 ... Over limit Positiv logic define... free 1-Limit1 ON... 1-Limit1 OFF... Normal Normal % %
Set-up window Limit switches Setting up and activating the limit switches (Enable).
Limit switches to go to the required Enter a number (1 to 4) and confirm with set-up range; this saves you having to run through all the edit fields or selection fields with the cursor keys.
Name Name of the limit switch or its function, depending on your choice (for example Emergency Off).
free disabled Over limit Below limit Positive logic Negative logic Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12
Enable Switches limit switch monitoring on or off. Input signal Selects the source of the signal that you want to monitor (Gross/Net/Peak values/Peak value combine).
Normal Inverse
No Yes
Level Input the operate value in displayed units (e.g. kg).
LIV-Delay 12 3 4 LIV-On LIV-Off Delay time 0ms
Hysteresis Hysteresis is understood to mean the changed onset of the switching effect between the On and Off states. The hysteresis prevents fluttering of the limit switch when the switching level is reached.
OK OK
Cancel OK
F-9
Direction Input the operating direction of the limit switch. a) Switching when Over the switching level limit
Level
Hysteresis
1 0
Amplifier output signal Limit switch On Limit switch Off
LED LED
b) Switching when Below the switching level limit Level

1 0
Hysteresis
Limit switch On Limit switch Off
LED LED
Limit switch delay You can enter a limit switch delay time of 0 99999 ms. Switch at Delay time of 60 ms
30ms
Level Hysteresis
1 0 60 ms Delay time
F-10
The limit switch should only operate if the signal has been above the level for a long time (here 60 ms). The limit switch should not operate if the signal has only been above the level for a short time (here 30ms).
Output logic You can change the output logic of the remotes as required.
Positive logic On =High Off=Low
Negative logic On =Low Off=High
Input Enable or disable use of function keys to input limit switches. Message when ON Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to on (e.g. below 20kg, see also the figure on page F-14). You may also select the display mode (Standard=black font on a light background; Inverse=light font on a dark background).
Message when OFF Edit field for a message that will be displayed when switching to off (e.g. below 20kg). You may also select the display mode (Standard=black font on a light background; Inverse=light font on a dark background).
F-11
2.3
Selection keys in the menu Limit switches
Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal On level Off level Input Hysteresis
Channel 1
1 .... 1-Limit1 ... No Gross 10.000 ... 9.9000 ... disabled variable V V
NOTE
It may be an advantage to use the horizontal cursor keys when enabling. As soon as you have entered your set-up in the required selection box or edit field (in this case Enable), confirm it with
(Edit fields)
and press . By doing this you stay in the required selection box (edit field), but skip to the next limit switch.
F-12
Additional functions Combine limit switches
Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only)
Using this function you can logically combine selected limit switches to a limit switch output.
LIV output Input the required limit switch output (, 1, 2, 3, 4). Comb. Logical combination of the input signals (AND, OR, EXOR, NAND, NOR, NEXOR). Input 1...4 Choose the inputs to be combined (Limit1 (LIV1) to Limit4 (LIV4) or remote contact).
Combine LIV
Combine LIV LIV output: Comb.: Input 1: Input 2: Input 3: Input 4:

3 AND LIV 1 LIV 2
Channel 1
LIV 4 LIV 4 inverted Remote contact 4 Remote contact 4 inverted AND OR EXOR NAND NOR NEXOR
1 2 3 4
F-13
Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF Limit switch 2 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF Limit switch 3 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF
Channel 1
1 1-Limit1 Yes Gross 10,000 ... 0.010 ... Over limit Positiv logic define... free Over 10kN... Under 10kN... Normal Invers kN kN
Example: Task: To monitor the range between 10 kN and 20 kN, and evaluate it as OK. The evaluation will be displayed as OK or NOK. Solution: Limit switch 1 monitors the 10 kN limit, whilst limit switch 2 monitors the 20 kN limit. Both are combined to one another by AND. The result from this combination controls the output of limit switch 3.
kN 20
OK
Channel 1
2... 1-Limit2 ... Yes Gross 20,000... 0.010 ... Below limit Negative logic define... free Below 20kN ... Over 20kN... Normal Invers kN kN
10
1 0 1 0 1 0
Limit1 Limit2 Limit3
Channel 1
3 1-Limit3 Yes Gross 0,000 ... 0.010 ... Over limit Positiv logic define... free OK NOK Normal Invers kN kN
F-14

3 AND LIV 1 LIV 2
Channel 1
If limit switch 1 is undershot, the settings shown in this example give rise to the following display (screen type 7Status limit switch):
LIMIT VALUE 1ML30B Gross 8.483 kN 1Limit Below 10kN 1 1Limit Below 20kN 2 1Limit NOK 3 Measure
Additional functions Adjusting peak values
F-15
4 4.1
Adjusting peak values Peak value stores
Measured peak value
You can use the Peak values function to record and save isolated signal peaks and minimum/maximum signal amplitudes. All amplifiers have two peak value stores each. You can use these to save: Maxima Minima or Peak-to-peak amplitudes
26 sec
Gross Peak value stores Net (envelope) Peaktopeak Display
In the case of rapid dynamic signals, you must taken into account that the peak values are defined in a fixed time raster. If filter cut-off frequencies are set up > 5 Hz Bessel or 10 Hz Butterworth, the raster is scanned 38400 times per second, corresponding to 26 sec. The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter. Setting up peak value stores From the Function selection fields, select the minimum or maximum signal for which you want the peak value to be saved. In the Envelope selection fields, switch on the envelope function. In the right-hand edit field, enter the decay time in milliseconds.
F-16
4.2
Combine peak value stores
Combine peak value stores

Gross
Net
Store1 Store12
Peak value stores
Store2
Peak value stores (PVS)
Channel 1
There are four possible ways to combine peak value stores: 1. Difference generation: Store1 Store2 (used as Peak/Peak).
F
Maximum gross Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Off 0 ... ms Store2 Function Maximum gross Off 0 ... ms Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 12
Off On Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net
Store1 Signal curve Maximum, gross Peak-to-peak value t Minimum, gross Store2
Fig.4.1:
Peak value combination when calculating difference
F-17
2. Mean generation: ( PVS1)PVS2) 2

Store1
Peak value stores
Mean value Store2

Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Store2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 12
Off Off
Channel 1
0 ... 0 ... ms
Maximum gross
Maximum gross ms
Fig.4.2:
Peak value combination when calculating mean value
3. Integrate gross: B/n B = gross signal n = number of points

Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net
Off On Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net
4. Integrate net: N/n N = gross signal n = number of points The mean value of the gross/net signal is generated for your choice of time interval. The values are added at a sample rate of 1200 Hz (for filter frequencies >5 Hz: Bessel; >10 Hz: Butterworth).
You can allocate a F-key (function Start/Stop integration; see page G-25) or use a remote contact (INT) to set the start/end of integration.
F-18
4.3
Controlling the peak value store
Three remote contacts have an effect on the peak value store: CPV: HLD: INT: Used to clear the peak value store Freezes or unfreezes the current contents of the memory Starts and stops integration for a particular time interval
You can use these remote control elements to carry out other functions, such as storing current values.
F-19
4.4
Peak value operating mode
Vi, Vo
Output
Measurement signal
In Peak value operating mode you can save the minimum value, the peak value or the peak-to-peak value (function Run). Use the Hold function to hold the contents of the store. For all connection boards except AP13i
Function Operating mode
Run Peak value
t Hold Run Current value
Function Peak value: Memory runs in chosen direction Freeze value
Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value 5V Any
Control circuit for HLD Run/Hold 5V 0V
For connection boards AP13i

Function Peak value: Memory runs in chosen direction Freeze value Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value 0V Any Control circuit for HLD Run/Hold 0V 24 V
F-20
4.5
Current value operating mode
Measurement signal Vi, Vo Output
In Current value operating mode, the memory is constantly updated (function Run). Use the Hold function to hold the contents of the store. You can use the remote contacts to switch the peak value store to current value operating mode. For all connection boards except AP13i
t Function Operating mode Run Hold Current value Run
Function Current value: Memory runs in each direction Freeze value
Control circuit Peak/Current value 0V Any
Control circuit Run/Hold 5V 0V
For connection boards AP13i

Function Current value: Memory runs in each direction Freeze value Control circuit for CPV Peak/Current value 24 V Any Control circuit Run/Hold 0V 24 V
F-21
4.6
Envelope curve operating mode
Output signal
100% 30%
Input signal
Time constant
Time constant: OK
Peak value stores can also be used to provide an envelope display. The envelope function is suitable for measuring amplitude modulated vibration. Inputting a decay time defines how quickly the peak value store is discharged to 30 % of the peak value when the latter is no longer present at memory input. The choice of decay time depends on the basic vibration frequency f0 and the modulation frequency. Usable envelopes are obtained in most cases with a decay time which is about a multiple of 10 of the basic frequency period (t= 10 / f0).
Time constant: too long
Time constant: too short
F-22
4.7
Clear peak value store
The peak value stores are abbreviated to Store1 and Store2 in the set-up windows because this form of notation is shorter. Clear peak value store There are three ways in which you can clear a peak value store: 1. By means of a function key (factory setting
Peak value stores
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
/level3).
2. With the remote contacts CPV1/CPV2 (in the pull-up menu Amplifier/ set-up window Switch, ON must be selected in the Remote selection field).
Store1 Function Store1 Envelope curve Store2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 12
Off Off
Channel 1
0 ... 0 ... ms ms
3. From a computer, with the command CPV.
Maximum gross
Maximum gross
Off On Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net
Additional functions Version
F-23
Version
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
You may use the channel selection keys to display information about the version of your device components one after another. In the header on the right is the name of the device components (e.g. AB, CP, Channel 1, etc.) and their version is displayed. The first line of the box below gives information on device identification and the second line gives the serial number. You may enter any text you wish in the comment line.
Version
Version
KANAL 1
Identification: Comments:
HBM, RD002ML50B, P4.0A ...
Serial and revisionnumber
ML801B
Serial No. xxxx
Rev.No. xxxx
F-24
Additional functions Switch
Switch
The first things you find in the Switch set-up window are three buttons, which you can use for
>T<
taring zero balancing clearing the peak value store.
>0<
Switch
Switch
Channel 1
You can use the selection fields that come after, to switch between the possible states of the functions Autocalibration, Parameter set, Amplifier input, Remote and Channel-LED. Autocal
Off
>T<
Autocal Param.set Ampl. Input Off
Zero
>0<
Remote control 1internal ChannelLED Status
Switching automatic calibration on and off. When AUTOCAL is On, this improves the temperature tracking of zero point and the long term stability of the amplifier. If you need the analogue output signal for continuous monitoring, you must switch autocalibration off. This is because during calibration no data is acquired, giving rise to a gap in the measurement output (at intervals of approx. 5 minutes, lasting about 1 second, depending on the filter setting. Parameter set Selecting stored parameter sets (see also H-9). Ampl. Input Zero: Cal: Measure: Shunt: Zero signal; input internal to zero potential Calibration signal The current measurement signal is present at the input Shunt resistor on (shunt calibration)
F-25
Switch
Channel 1
Remote control Switching Remote on/off (activates the remote contacts) ChannelLED This switches the function of the LEDs on the front panel of the amplifier. Status: Status display (Amplifier active, Error, Limit switches)
>T<
Autocal Param.set Ampl. Input Off
>0<
Remote control Off 1internal
Zero
ChannelLED Status
Off 5 Min once
Zero Cal Measure
1internal 2internal 3internal 4internal 5internal 6internal 7internal 8internal
Status Level
Level: Amplifier level control coefficient
Off On
F-26
G-1
Display
G-2
Display Display format
G-3
Display format
1 value
Gross
Channel
The settings determine how the selected signals are displayed. You can basically select four different signals (Gross, Net, Limit switches, Peak values) per channel. Values can be represented numerically or graphically. A maximum of six values can be displayed simultaneously in numerical representation. The display states shown on the left are described as types and can be selected from the setup menu.
Measure
Measure
Acal
3 values
Gross Gross Gross Measure Acal
Representation as a numerical value

Gross Gross Gross
6 values
Gross Gross Gross
1 value (with/without status line) 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram
Measure
Acal
YT-Diagram
Gross
Graphical representation
XY-Diagram
Gross Gross
Display four limit switch states

Status limit switch
Limit switch 1ML30B Gross 1Limit1 Below 10kN 1Limit2 Below 20kN 1Limit3 NOK Acal Measure 8.483 kN
Status limit switch
Display with Data acquisition type Pre trigger status Post trigger status
Recording status
Test sequence 3
TIME: 00: 00: 00 1 4.0S
FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA
MEAS. RATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100 16.0S

120 MB FREE
Get DAQ1
Acal
... ...
G-4
1.1
Select set-up window

. .
3. Select Display format from the pull-up menu and confirm with
Display format F-keys Channel names
You are now in the Display format set-up window.
Display Format
Screen No: Type: Channels/Signals: all Off Status line
one value
0 ... one value define...
G-5
1.2
Set-up window Display format
Display format Screen No: Type: 0 ... one value
one value
Channels/Signals: all Off Status line Off On all Selection free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Limit_V. status Status data acquisition
define...
The structure of the Display format set-up window depends on the selected Type. The window mask changes according to the selected Type. For instance the Status line selection field is only present for the 1 value type.
Display format Screen No: Type: 0 ... one value
one value
Menu for 1 value type
Channels/Signals: all Off Status line
define...
0...9 Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): 0 ... 3 values define... 3 values
Menu for 3 values type

Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel All channels All signals
Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
relativ to base Channel 2 Signal Gross relativ to base Channel 1 Signal Gross
Value 3:
G-6
1.3
Set-up window components
Dsplay format Screen No: Type: 0 ... one value
one value
Number You can enter the numbers 1...9 in this edit field. In this way you can store your current display settings under a number or recall the factory presets. In the same way you can determine the sequence in which the types are selected in measuring mode with the The following sequence is preset at the factory:
Number 0 1
0...9
Channels/Signals: all Off Status line Off On all Selection free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Limit_V. status Status data acquisition
define...
cursor keys.
Type 1 value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Status limit switch DAQ status Free Free Free
Channels/Signals All All All All All
Status line On
2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Type Use the Type to define the number of measurement signals that can be displayed simultaneously (numerical value only) or the representation mode (graphic only) in the display. You can also display the status of four selected limit switches.
G-7
1.3.1 Numerical display
Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: 0 ... 3 values
3 values
Channels/Signals At this point you define which channels and signals are to be shown on the first display line. You can define your settings for all channels or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... ). You can recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. At this point, 3/6 values types are used to define the basic channels (Value 1). Define... The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal. Status line With the 1 value type, the status line can be superimposed on the display.
define...
relativ to base Channel 2 Signal Gross 0...9 all Selection Free One value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram 0...9 Absolute relativ to base
none Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 as base
Value1 (Base)
3 values
Gross Gross Gross
Measure
6 values
Gross Gross Gross
Measure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
Gross Gross Gross
G-8
Value (2...6): Channel The value entered depends on the absolute/relative selection. This setting lets you use 3 values and 6 values types to define which reference to the basic channel is produced. Absolute/relativ to base This setting lets you use 3 values and 6 values types to define whether a reference to the channel number of the basic channel is produced. Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels in measuring mode has no effect on this display value. relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel (display value 1). Channels to the left of the basic channel are entered with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with a positive sign. Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual (absolute) channel number.
G-9
Set-up window
Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: define... 0 ... 3 values Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 Cancel
4 4 4
All channels
All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
relativ to base Channel 1 Signal Gross relativ to base Channel 2 Signal Gross Basic channel C3
Value 3:
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
MGCplus device
()
(+) +2
Display
Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 5 Net Gross Gross Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Basic value
G-10
DISPLAY FORMAT Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: 0 ... 3 values
3 values
Example 1: 6-channel module; 3 values type The setting in the Channels/Signals selection field and the relative channel number affect the sequence of the values displayed in measuring mode.
define...
a) Channels/Signals: + All The channel selection keys starting with the basic channel.
Display Basic value C3 Value 1 Value 2: Channel+2 rel. C5 Value 2 Value 3: Channel 1 rel. C2 Value 3
relativ to base Channel 2 Signal Gross Channel Signal Gross 1 relativ to base
are used to select all channels in turn,
Value 3:
C4 C6 C3
Value 1 Value 2 Value 3
C5 C1 C4
C6 C2 C5
C1 C3 C6
C2 C4 C1
Use the cursor keys (SIGNAL) to display all signals from the basic channel that were set up in the Select channel/signal menu.
G-11
Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: 0 ... 3 values
3 values
Example 1 (Continued): 6-channel unit; 3 values type b) Channels/Signals: + select The channel selection keys are used in measuring mode to select
define...
relativ to base Channel 2 Signal Gross relativ to base Channel 1 Signal Gross
the required channels for the basic channel (in this example 1, 3, 5) one after the other. The display fields of non-selected channels stay blank.
Display Value 1 Value 2 Value 3
Value 3:
C3 Value 2: Channel+2 C5 Value 3: Channel 1 C2
C5 C4
Value 1 Value 3
C1 C3
Value 1 Value 2
Use the cursor keys (SIGNAL) in measuring mode displays all signals from the basic channel that were set up in the Select channel/signal menu (in the first display line).
affects Select channel/signal affects
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4
Channel Channel Channel
G-12
Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): 0 ...
3 values
Example 2: The net weights of three containers are to be displayed simultaneously. The following assignment is to apply: Container 1 Channel 1
define...
3 values
Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: Channel Signal Channel Signal 2 Net 3 Net
Container 2 Channel 2 Container 3 Channel 3 First of all the channel names are specified. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . to return to set-up mode.
absolute absolute
Value 3:
3. Select Channel names from the pull-up menu and confirm with .
4. Enter CONTAINER 1 in the Channel 1 edit field and confirm with .
5. Enter CONTAINER 2 in the Channel 2 edit field and confirm with .
6. Enter CONTAINER 3 in the Channel 3 edit field and confirm with 7. Press . .
8. Select Display format from the pull-up menu and confirm with 9. Use .
to select 3 VALUES from the Type selection field and .
confirm with
G-13
10. Use
to choose Selection from the Channels/Signals selection . .
field and confirm with 11. Use 12. Use
to choose the define... symbol and confirm with
to choose the Channel1/Net control field and confirm with (the control field displays n).
13. Use 14. Use
to select the key symbol OK and confirm with
to choose the Value2:Channel edit field and enter 2. , select
15. Select the Absolute/relative selection field with absolute and confirm with 16. Use .
to choose the Signal selection field, select Net and .
to choose the Value3:Channel edit field and enter 3. , select
18. Select the Absolute/relative selection field with absolute and confirm with 19. Use .
to choose the Signal selection field, select Net and . and confirm the
confirm with
To return to measuring mode, press the shift key security prompt with .
G-14
Example 3: One force and one path are to be measured on each of two presses. The following assignment is to apply: Force on press 1 Path for press 1 Force on press 2 Path for press 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
A display with three values is required, for which a comparison of the same signals will have to be made between press 1 and press 2.
Path P1 Force P1 Force P1
Store1 Store1 Store2
Path P2 Force P2 Force P2
Store1 Store1 Store2
First of all the channel names are specified.
CHANNEL NAMES
1. Use the shift key 2. Press .
Channel1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4: Channel 5: Channel 6:
Force P1 Path P1 Force P2 Path P2
3. Select Channel names from the pull-up menu and confirm with . . .
4. Enter FORCE P1 in the Channel 1 edit field and confirm with 5. Enter PATH P1 in the Channel 2 edit field and confirm with
G-15
Channel names
6. Enter FORCE P2 in the Channel 3 edit field and confirm with 7. Enter PATH P2 in the Channel 4 edit field and confirm with 8. Press . .
Channel 1: Channel 2: Channel 3: Channel 4:

Display format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): 1
Force P1 Path P1 Force P2 Path P2

3 values
3 values define...
9. Select Display format from the pull-up menu and confirm with 10. Enter 1 in the Number edit field and confirm with 11. Use
absolute
Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: Channel Signal Channel Signal 2 Net 3 Net
absolute
to select 3 VALUES from the Type selection field and .
Value 3:
to choose select from the Display format : . .
Channels/Signals selection field and confirm with 13. Use 14. Use with 15. Use with 16. Use
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
to choose the define... symbol and confirm with
to choose the Channel2/Store1 control field and confirm (the control field displays n). to choose the Channel4/Store1 control field and confirm (the control field displays n). to select the key symbol OK and confirm with .
G-16
Display Format Screen No: Type: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: Selection Value 2: Channel Signal Channel Signal 1 Store1 1 1 3 values
3 values
17. Enter 1 in the Value 2: Channel edit field and confirm with 18. Use
to select relative from the absolute/relative selection field .
define...
and confirm with 19. Use
relative
to select Store1 from the Signal selection field and . .
Value 3:
relative
Store2
confirm with
20. Enter 1 in the Value 3: Channel edit field and confirm with 21. Use
to select relative from the absolute/relative selection field .
and confirm with 22. Use
to select Store2 from the Signal selection field and . and confirm the security prompt with .
confirm with 23. Press shift key
G-17
1.3.2 Graphic display
Type YT-Diagram
Gross
YT-Diagram This diagram is used to examine changes in measured values over time. Sampling rate Signal sampling interval. Channels/Signals At this point you define which channels and signals are to be represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... ). You can recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. Define... The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal.
define... % %
Set-up window
Display Format Screen No: Type: Sampling rate YT-Diagram 0 ... YT-Diagram 1s
Channels/Signals: Selection YMax YMin 100... 100...
G-18
Set-up window
Display format Screen No: Type: Sampling rate YT-Diagram 0 ... YT-Diagram 1s define... % %
YMax Maximum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %). YMin Minimum display value by reference to present Range 1 (in %).
Present channel Present measurement signalPresent value
Gross
Channels/Signals: all YMax YMin 100... 100...
YMax
Zero point
y-Raster 1 division y-Raster Scale Time raster Time raster 1 division Scale
YMin
G-19
Type XY-Diagram
Gross
XY-Diagram Sampling rate Signal sampling interval. Channels/Signals At this point you define which channels and signals are to be represented in the display. You can define your settings for all channels ). You can or just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other. Define...
Gross
Setup menu
Screen DisplayNo: format Type: Sampling rate: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: all XMax XMin Value 2: Channel Signal YMax YMin 100... 100... 2 Net 100... 100... % % % % absolute define... 0 ... XY-Diagram 1s XY-Diagram
The key symbol opens a new window Select channel/signal.
G-20
Setup menu
Display format Screen No: Type: Sampling rate: Value 1 (Base): Channels/Signals: all XMax XMin Value 2: Channel Signal YMax YMin 100... 100... 2 Net 100... 100... % % % % absolute define... 0 ... XY-Diagram 1s XY-Diagram
YMax Maximum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). YMin Minimum value on the vertical axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). XMax Maximum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present measuring range (%). XMin Minimum value on the horizontal axis by reference to the present measuring range (%).
Present channel Present measurement signal x-Raster Gross Scale y-Raster 1 division YMin x-Raster 1 division XMin XMax Gross Present value (x) y-Raster Scale Present value (y)
YMax
G-21
1.4
Status limit switch
Type: Status limit switch

LIMIT SWITCH
1ML30B 1Limit1 1Limit2 1Limit3
Title Any user-specific name; it appears in the header (factory setting Limit switch).
8.483 kN
Title
Gross Below 10kN Below 20kN NOK
Status line 1 (base): channel At this point you define which channels and signals are to be displayed on the first status line. You can define your settings for all channels or ). You can just for certain ones (Selection) (key symbol define... recall a maximum of six signals per channel one after the other.
Status limit switch
Measure Set-up window

Display format Screen No: Type: Title 0 ... Status limit switch Limit switch define... relativ to base
Define... The key symbol opens new Menu Select channel/signal. Absolute/relativ to base This setting lets you define whether a reference to the basic channel is produced. Absolute: The measured value and signal of the selected channel are displayed independently of the basic value. The number entered corresponds to the actual channel number. Changing channels has no effect. Relativ to base: The number entered refers to the basic channel. The basic channel number is 0. Channels to the left of the basic channel are entered with a negative sign and those to the right of it are entered with a positive sign. Caution: This value does not correspond to the actual (absolute) channel number!
Status line 1 (base): Channels/Signals: all Status line 2: Channel 2 LV 1 Channel 2 1 LV Channel 2 LV 1
Status line 3:
absolute absolute
Status line 4:
NOTE
Enter the description of the limit switches in the menu.
Options Limit switches
G-22
1.5
Status data acquisition
Type: Status data acquisition
Bar chart This diagram shows the current state of data acquisition. Data acquisition comment
Data acquisition comment Test sequence 3

TIME: 00: 00: 00 1 4.0S FILE NAME: MGCP0000.MEA
Bar chart
MEAS. RATE: 50Hz PERIODS: 100
User note (e.g. measurement sequence number). Measuring rate The current measuring rate for all the defined channels is shown here. Time Time elapsed since the start of the period. Periods Number of periods. File name
16.0S 120 MB FREE
Get DAQ1
Acal
Pre trigger
Post trigger
Name of the stored file. When you restart the program, the file is not overwritten, instead the counter (last four places) is incremented. xxx MB FREE: Shows the amount of free memory on the hard disk.
Current period
NOTE
The MGCplus computer detects when the storage capacity on the hard disk falls below 1 MB. In this case, data acquisition is cancelle0d and the file is closed.
Display F-keys
G-23
2 2.1
F-keys F-keys in measuring mode
F-keys Level 1
Gross Channel
Function keys F1...F4 operate in both measuring mode and set-up mode. In measuring mode you can switch between a total of 9 functions on three levels: 1st level F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 Zeroing Tare Clear peak value store Autocalibration Ident (import transducer characteristics) Switch display unit (see also page E-16) Remote on/off LIV level Start/Stop
Measure
> 0 <
> T <
II
F-keys Level 2
Acal Measure Unit ...
2nd level
F-keys Level 3
Rem/Loc Limit_V Start/Stop ...
3rd level
F-key field
...
Key assignment is freely selectable. The assignment listed above is the factory setting. Key F4 toggles between factory setting and the next level (...F-level). You can make the effect of functions apply to all channels or restrict it to one (of those selected). In measuring mode the current key assignment is displayed in the lower display line for all screen types. If you have set the function for all channels, this is indicated by the ... symbol in the upper right corner of the F-key field.
G-24
Display F-keys
Function Tare Zeroing Clear stores Zero/Cal/Measure Autocal LED Status/Level LIV level Remote/Local Shunt On/Off Start/Stop display Print display Print values Print setup Load next P-set Load previous P-set Switch display unit Start/Stop integration Start/Stop data acquis. Load data acquis. set Load DAQ comments Linearization on/off Ident
Effect Taring is triggered. A zero balance is carried out. Clears the peak value store Switches between the zero signal, the calibration signal and the measurement signal. Autocalibration is switched on or off. Switches between the Status and Level LED displays. Call the LIV level menu. Remote On/Off. Switches shunt (transducer, AP14) on or off. The measured value currently being displayed is frozen in the indicator (pause function). Prints the current display (except for graphics). Prints the current measured values. Prints the stored parameter sets. Reads the next parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8). Reads the previous parameter set from the amplifier(s) (1 to 8). Switches between the native unit (mV/V), the user-defined unit (for instance kg) and the analogue output (V). Integration of peak values is switched on or off. Data acquisition is switched on or off. Reads parameter sets from RAM (parameter set 0) or the hard disk (parameter sets 1 to 16). Reads data acquisition comments from hard disk. Linearization of the transducers characteristic on/off Imports transducer characteristic data
Tab 2.1:
Function key shortcuts
Display F-keys
G-25
Set-up window
F-Keys setup Level 1 ... Level 1
Select setup window 1. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode.
F1: Tare F2: Zero/Cal/Measure One channel F3: Autocal One channel F4: ...F-level One channel
2. Press
. .
3. Select F-keys from the pop-up menu and confirm with You are now in the F-keys set-up window.
1 2 3
not assigned Tare Zeroing Clear stores Zero/Cal/Measure Autocal LED Status/Level LIV level Remote/Local Shunt On/Off Start/Stop display Print display Print values Print setup Load from XM001 Load next P-set Load previous P-set Switch display unit Start/Stop integration Start/Stop data acquis. Load DAQ param. set Load DAQ comments
One channel All channels
G-26
Display F-keys
2.2
F-keys in set-up mode
Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Display System
In set-up mode use the function keys to call the pull-up menus from the menu bar.
Amplifier Options
Display Channel names
G-27
Channel names
Set-up window
Select set-up window 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . to go to setup mode
Channel name
Channel 3.1
3. Select Channel names from the pull-up menu and confirm with
Channel name: System Force ... Amplifier Options
. In the set-up window all existing channels have the factory specified channel names in the first instance. (e.g.: Empty edit fields indicate free card slots on your unit.)
Display
NOTE
If you wish to apply a new description to an edit field that has already been described, you can delete the whole of the old entry using the clear key .
G-28
Display Channel names
H-1
System
H-2
System Password
H-3
Password
You can protect all the settings on your unit with a password. In factory setting this password protection is disabled. Once password protection is activated, the password must be entered each time Setup mode is called (and whenever the unit is switched on again). Only then can the settings be changed. There is no need to enter a password just for measuring mode. Access authorisation is linked to the password: System (all settings can be changed) Operator (only enabled settings can be changed)
You can define a password and access authorisation for a maximum of nine users. Important: When the equipment is in ex-factory status, password protection cannot be enabled until a new user with System access authorisation has been defined.
H-4
System Password
1.1
Define new user

to go to setup mode
2. Press
. . .
3. Select Password from the pull-up menu and confirm with

4. Select the new key symbol with
and confirm with
5. Enter the new user names in the User: edit field and confirm with . 6. Select the Password edit field with , enter your password and
Password User: Password: Access: new... change... set... delete...
confirm with
. , select the required . .
7. Choose the Access: selection field with access authorisation and confirm with 8. Select the OK key symbol with
and confirm with
Add user User: Password: Access: OK Operator Cancel Operator System
System Password
H-5
1.2
Enable password protection
If you are already in the Password setup window, go straight to point 4. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . . . to return to set-up mode.
3. Select Password from the pull-up menu and confirm with 4. Select the set...... key symbol with
Authorisation of the operator Password protection System Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue output Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Tie limit switches Peak value stores Version OK Cancel Off Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
and confirm with
5. Press 6. Use
Off On
. to choose selection field Password protection .

On
and
confirm with
Display
If the error message No user with System access is displayed at this point, press the Cancel key
Off
Amplifier
to delete the error message. Use again. Press twice. You are now in
and press to select
Options
the PASSWORD setup window. Now define a user with system privileges, as described in Chap.1.1.
7. Press with .
(which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm
H-6
System Password
1.3
Set operator access
If you are already in the Password setup window, go straight to point 4. 1. Use the shift key 2. Press . . . to go to setup mode
3. Select Password from the pull-up menu and confirm with 4. Select the set... key symbol with
Authorisation of the operator Password protection System Password Save/Recall Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue output Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Tie limit switches Peak value stores Version OK Cancel Off Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
and confirm with
5. Choose the required No/Yes selection field with with . and confirm with
and confirm
6. Select the required set-up with 7. Press with .
Display
Amplifier
Options
and confirm the
System Password
H-7
1.4
Delete user
If you are already in the Password setup window, go straight to point 4.

1. Use the shift key 2. Press .
3. Select Password from the pull-up menu and confirm with You are now in the Password setup window. 4. Select the delete... key symbol with 5. Use and confirm with
to select the delete... key symbol next to the required .
user and confirm with 6. Press with .
Delete user User1: User2: User3: OK Miller Morgan delete delete delete Cancel
H-8
System Password
1.5
Change password
If you are already in the Password setup window, go straight to point 4.

to go to setup mode
3. Select Password from the pull-up menu and confirm with You are now in the Password setup window. 4. Select the change... key symbol with and confirm with
5. Enter the password in the New password edit field and confirm
with 6. Press with
. (which takes you straight to the OK key) and confirm .
Change password New password: OK Cancel
System Save/Load
H-9
Save/Load
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
With the Save/Load function you can save the current set-ups for the AB22A/AB32/CP42 or the amplifier plug-in modules (up to 8 parameter sets per channel), or load saved setups. You may use Factory setting to load the ex-factory settings as delivered. You may even copy settings from one amplifier to another.
Volatile memory (8h)
RAM
Factory setting load save
EPROM
Save/Load setup save load Copy Factory setting
Internal EEPROM (8 parameter sets)

Permanent save
OK Load parameter Channel Param.set CP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 1 1 1 1
Automatically from disk
OK
Cancel
Save parameter Channel Param.set CP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 1 1 1 1
OK
Cancel
H-10
System Save/Load
Save parameter 1. Use the shift key 2. Press 3. Select Save/Load from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the Save/Load setup set-up window. 4. In the Copy from channel edit field, use button and confirm with . to choose the save . to go to setup mode
5. In the Param.set check box, specify the channel number of the parameter set under which you want your settings to be saved and confirm with . to select the key
6. In the Copy from channel edit field, use symbol OK and confirm with .
and confirm the
System Save/Load
H-11
Load parameter 1. Use the shift key

2. Press
3. Select Save/Load from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the Save/Load setup set-up window. 4. In the Copy from channel edit field, use button and confirm with .
to choose the load
5. In the Param.set check box, specify under the channel number the parameter set with the settings you want to load and confirm with . 6. In the Copy from channel edit field, use symbol OK and confirm with . to select the key
OK Load parameter Channel Param.set CP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 1 1 1 1
To return to measuring mode, press the shift key

and confirm the
OK
Cancel
security prompt with
.
3
When the MGCplus is powered up or the hard disk is connected, the amplifier settings that are stored on the PCMCIA hard disk (CP42) are automatically loaded into a device that is switched on and standing by.
H-12
System Save/Load
Factory setting A new set-up window opens under Factory setting, and you can then define whether all amplifiers or only particular ones are to be set to ex-factory status. You may also load the factory set-ups for the display and control panel (AB) and communications processor (CP). 1. Use the shift key
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
2. Press 3. Select Save/Load from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the Save/Load setup set-up window. 4. In the Copy from channel edit field, use to choose the . .
Factory setting button and confirm with
to select the required 5. In the Copy from channel edit field, use channels (or even AB, CP) from control fields 1 to 16 and confirm with labelled
OK
(a tick appears in the selection box). With the button

All
select all the control fields at once. to select the key
6. In the Copy from channel edit field, use

Load factory setup
AB CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
symbol OK and confirm with
All
OK
Cancel
and confirm the
System Save/Load
H-13
Copy setup
Some or all of the settings can be sent as required from one channel to another (or to several). The Copy button is used for this. 1. Use the shift key to return to set-up mode.
2. Press 3. Select Save/Load from the pull-up menu and confirm with This takes you to the Save/Load setup set-up window. 4. Use to choose the Copy button and confirm with . .
5. In the Copy from channel edit field, use to select the number of the channel from which you want to copy the setups and confirm with .
OK
6. In the Copy from channel edit field, use to select from control fields 1 to 16 the required channels from which you want to import settings and confirm with (a tick appears in the selection box). If you wish to accept settings from all channels, select the All
1
Copy setup Copy from channel: All Whole setup Remote contacts Limit switches Peak values Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs
button and confirm with
to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
7. In the Copy from channel edit field, use to select from the vertical control fields the channels from which you want to import settings, and confirm with (a tick appears in the selection box). to select the key
OK
Cancel
8. In the Copy from channel edit field, use symbol OK and confirm with .
and confirm the

H-14
System Data acquisition
Recording measurement series
PC card harddisk
CP42
RS 232 CARDBUS
With MGCplus, to record measurement series, you can configure and save up to 17 data acquisition programs (16 on the hard disk). Saved data is stored in the RAM of communications processor CP42, or on its PC card harddisk (optional). The following types of harddisks are supported: Harddisk type ATA standard, Type 2 (narrow design, approx. 5 mm thick) The maximum capacity is in principle not limited. At the moment the PC card harddisks up to 5 GB have been tested. Formatted in FAT-16 or FAT-32 data systems. Other data systems (e.g. NTFS) are not supported.
USB DEVICE
USB HOST
As the data rates of these hard disks are generally limited to 1 MB/s, a maximum of 13 channels of the MGCplus in 4 byte format with a maximum measurement rate of 19.2 kHz can be recorded.
ETHERNET
CAUTION
Avoid electrostatic discharge! The PCMCIA hard disk might be damaged by static discharge. Touch a grounded object before installation or wear an approved grounding wristband. To set the measurement series parameters, use either display and control panel AB22A/AB32, or the PC software HBM MGCplus Assistant.
H-15
3.1
Setting the measurement series parameters
Select setup window 1. Use the shift key

to return to set-up mode. , use the cursor keys to select .
2. Press the function key

Data acquisition
Data acquisition and confirm with Measuring rate/interval

DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1000 ... Periods: Channels/Signals: Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: File name: DAQ comments: Format: Reduction factor: Auto start: Param. set:
No
Required measuring rate (above 1Hz select in Hz) or measuring interval (below 1Hz select in seconds) for all the defined channels.
20.00 s...
50Hz
Time: 10 ...
Values Number of values to be measured per period. Time Length of the period in seconds, minutes or hours.
define... define...
20.00 % ... Immediate
Time stamp:
Number of values file on HD MGCP0000.MEA ... change 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB 480
NOTE
Values and Time affect each other. If you define the number of values for a given period, the time will be calculated and vice versa. Periods Number of periods. If zero is selected here, once the period is started by an F-key, it will be repeated endlessly. Example:
s min h 50 values 1sec
save
read
1000 values t 20sec Period 1 20sec Period 2 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
H-16
Time stamp If time stamp is selected ( the files. ), two additional time columns appear in
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Example: You have selected: Channel 2: Gross; Channel 4: Net, Store1; and Time stamp.
File name:
Channel2 Gross Channel4 Net Channel4 Store1 Time stamp 1 Carry Time stamp
DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz 50Hz 3: 100 Hz 20.00 s...
2: 2400 Hz Time: 1000 ...
Values: 1000 ... Periods: Channels/Signals: Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: Channel select Auto start:
Channels/Signals8 Select channels and signals (Gross, Net Store1, Store2) for the current measurement series. With all channels, all channels are activated and deactivated and the signal selection from the first column is retained.
define... define...
Time stamp:
Number of values file on HD

No
NOTE
If several ( 2) signals are chosen for a channel (e.g Gross and Net), the maximum measuring rate is reduced to 2400 Hz!
OK Param.set:
Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb.PV Remote
Cancel save
all channels read

2400Hz
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
H-17
No
Trigger function
20.00 s...
50Hz
Time: 10 ...
If you want to use the Trigger function, you must first define the trigger conditions. Three types of trigger are available:
define... define...
Time stamp:
1. Start trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions) 2. Stop trigger (with a maximum of four trigger conditions) 3. Measuring rate trigger (with Start and Stop) A Start or Stop condition (Trigger condition) can be:
a measurement level a measurement band
a limit switch an external input signal
save
read
These Start/Stop conditions can be defined independently and combinated together. The functions AND or OR are available for this (also see page H-19):
STARTTr. 4
Example
STARTTr. 1 STARTTr. 2 OR OR combination defines Start trigger event AND combination defines Stop trigger event STARTTr. 3 STOP-T r. 1 STOP-T r. 2 STOP-T r. 3 AND STOP-T r. 4
Define Trigger conditions
Setup Measure
Pre trigger
Time Get DAQ (F-key) Start DAQ
Data acquisition of a period

DAQ= Data acquisition program
Initialise Trigger measurement
H-18
Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
In the example on page H-17, the Start condition could be defined as: start measurement if force higher than 5 kN or if pressure lower than 5 bar or if the temperature is higher than 22oC
Define trigger Trigger: Type: Channel: Mode: Level: Start-Trigger 1 Off 1 higher 0.000000% ...
Start-Trigger 1
Define trigger This is where you define whether data acquisition starts immediately or whether a particular trigger event starts or stops data acquisition.
Signal:
Gross
0.000000% ...
Trigger You can set up to four different Start and Stop triggers and one measuring rate trigger. Measuring rate trigger The Start-Meas.rate-Trigger changes the measuring rate when the trigger event occurs. Example: The Trigger event will cause a switch from long-term measurement (e.g. measuring interval = 10000 sec) to dynamic measurement (e.g. measuring rate = 1200 Hz). Setting the trigger functions of the des CP22/CP42 digital inputs via the display and control units AB22A, ABX22A or AB32 is not possible.
OK
Cancel
Off Measurement level Measurement band Limit1 Limit2 Limit3 Limit4 External trigger
H-19
Mode Configure the Start/Stop conditions. Off: Trigger inactive Measurement level: Example:
Measurement level: lower higher
Trigger condition initiated by measurement signal when over or below level value.
Start-Trigger 1
Signal:
Gross
Level
0.000000% ...
OK
Cancel
Time Start of the data acquisition program Condition met
Example:
Measurement level: higher
Level
Time Start of the data acquisition program
Condition met
H-20
Measurement band:
Trigger condition initiated by measurement signal when over or below band limits. The band lies between Level 1 and Level 2.
Example:
Measurement band:
Define trigger Trigger: Type: Channel: Mode: Level: Start-Trigger 1 Off 1 higher 0.000000% ... 0.000000% ... Signal: Gross Start-Trigger 1
outside
inside
Level 2 Level 1 Time Start of the data acquisition program Condition met
OK
Cancel
Example:
Measurement band: inside

Level 2
Level 1 Time Start of the data acquisition program
Condition met
H-21
Limit1-Limit4:
The trigger is initiated by a limit switch (High: LED on, data acquisition program starts; Low: LED off). Trigger initiated by an external signal (remote contact 7 on the connection board).
External trigger:
Start-Trigger 1
Channel Source channel for the trigger definitions.
Signal:
Gross
Signal Source signal for the trigger definitions.
0.000000% ...
OK
Cancel
H-22
Gross Net Store1 Store2
Mode Use Mode to define when a trigger condition is met. The trigger type set will determine the different edges you can set:
Type Mode higher; lower; lower higher; higher
Start-Trigger 1
Measurement level Measurement band
lower outside
inside; outside; outside high, low; low high, low; low
inside; inside low low
Signal:
Gross
Limit switches External trigger
high; high high; high
0.000000% ...
OK
Cancel
Example: higher The trigger condition is met if the measurement signal is higher than the trigger level.
Level 2
higher lower lower higher
Level 1
higher lower

Level The level determines the difference value, for comparing with the measurement signal. 0, 1 or 2 trigger levels are active, depending on the trigger type set.
Type Measurement level Measurement band Limit switches External trigger which level is significant?.. level 1 only level 1 and level 2
1 2 3 4 5 7 8
H-23
Pre trigger: The Pre trigger input field establishes how many values are recorded before the trigger event (dividing measurement recording into a Pre trigger range and a Post trigger range). The entry refers to the Values input field in the setup dialogue. Example:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Values: 1200 Pre trigger: 20 % 120 values are recorded in the Pre trigger range and 1200120 = 1080 values are recorded in the Post trigger range.
4 Post trigger 3.2 sec
DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1200 ... Periods: Channels/Signals: Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: File name: DAQ comments Format: Reduction factor: Time: 1 ... 300Hz 4.0 s...
0.8 sec Pre trigger in %: Time 4 sec
define... define...
Time stamp:
Start condition: Immediate: AND-combined:

change
Ignore Start trigger. Data acquisition starts immediately. All Start conditions must be met, to start data acquisition. Data acquisition starts if one of the start conditions is met.
Number of values file on HD MGCP0000.MEA ...
OR-combined:
4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB 480
Auto start: No Number of values Param. set: save 1 Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined
read
NOTE
If only 1 trigger is on (e.g. Start-Trigger 1), you must select AND/OR (although a combination is not possible).
Immediate Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined
H-24
Stop condition: Number of values: Measurement ends, if the given number (entered under Values) of values is reached. AND-combined:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
All Stop conditions must be met, to end data acquisition. Data acquisition ends, if one of the Stop conditions is met.
OR-combined: Save to: file on HD:
Save to one file on the hard disk of MGCplus. Enter the name under File name.
DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Measuring rate/interval: Values: 1200 ... Periods: Channels/Signals: Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: File name: DAQ comments Format: Reduction factor: Auto start:
No
NOTE
4.0 s...
300Hz
Time: 1 ...
Re-starting the measurement program does not overwrite the file, instead it increments the counter in the file name (the first four letters are retained, the last four are incremented). Several files: Save to several files on the hard disk of the MGCplus (max. 999). If you compress the file, only one file will be created Save to internal RAM of CP42
define... define...
Time stamp:
Internal RAM: File name:
If you have chosen Save to file on HD, allocate the file name here.
NOTE
read
Param. set: save 1 Number of values Trigger ANDcombined Trigger ORcombined
Immediate Trigger ANDcombined Trigger ORcombined
Measurement files larger than 2 GB can not be operated on PCs with the Windows) operating system. The CP42 communication processor closes files with a file size of 2 GB and then continues recording in a new file.
H-25
Data acquisition comment You may assign any comment you like to a data acquisition. Comments can be viewed when the Data acquisition type is showing in the upper left part of the display. Data acquisition comment: Change
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
You may change an existing comment, that is, you may enter new or amended information. Data acquisition comment: Select You can select from the comments stored on the PCMCIA hard disk (see also page G-23, Load data acquisition comment). Format
No
50Hz 20.00 s...
Subsequent processing of the values determines the data acquisition format. You can select three different formats: 4 Byte INT, 2 Byte INT and 4 Byte FLOAT.
Time: 10 ...
define... define...
Time stamp:
NOTE
HBM Software packages such as MGCplus Wizard or catman can automatically detect all three formats and scale the values accordingly. If an accuracy of 32767 parts (i.e. measuring range divided into 32767 parts) is sufficient for your data acquisition, the 2 Byte INT format is advisable, as it only needs half as much storage space as the two other formats.
save
read
H-26
Reduction factor When you activate data reduction ( ), an additional data set is created on the PCMCIA hard disk during data acquisition. This data set does not store all measured values, but only the extreme values (Min/Max) recorded at specified intervals. The interval is determined by the reduction factor in relation to the measuring rate used. You may input a reduction factor in the range 480 to 32767. Example: MEAS. RATE: 2400 Hz Reduction factor: 480 2400 Hz + 5 Hz + ^ 200 ms interval 480
No
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
50Hz 20.00 s...
Time: 10 ...
Extreme values will be recorded at 200 ms intervals (acquisition rate 5 Hz).
define... define...
Time stamp:
NOTE
A reduced data set can only be created if only one signal is being acquired per channel (Select Gross/Net/Store1/Store2, see page H-16).
change
Number of values file on HD MGCP0000.MEA ...
save
read
H-27
. . . format: Reading a CP42 file You must know the internal file format to be able to read and interpret the data in the file. A CP42 file is a binary file, with the following structure: The following header data precedes the actual data area: File ID (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 6001 Channel values (4 Byte LONG) Length of a data row (i.e. one value for all channels/signals) in bytes (4 Byte LONG) Values of data rows (i.e. values/channel) in the file (4 Byte LONG) Data format used to save the values ( 4 Byte LONG) Measuring rate used for recording (4 Byte LONG) Size of the header area in bytes (4 Byte LONG) // currently = 512 Reserved (4 Byte LONG) Followed, for each channel, by: Channel number (4 Byte LONG) Scaling info: measuring range MR (4 Byte FLOAT) Scaling info: Offset (zero offset) OS (4 Byte FLOAT) Unit (4 Byte CHARACTER) Signal mask (4 Byte LONG) The signal mask specifies how many values appear in the data row for each channel: Bit 0 set: GROSS signal Bit 1 set: NET signal Bit 2 set: Peak value 1 Bit 3 set: Peak value 2
H-28
This means that a maximum of 4 successive values may be displayed for each individual channel. This channel block is followed by information on date and time: TimeDate (30 Byte CHARACTER) The subsequent bytes to the end of the header area are reserved for future use and can be omitted. They are followed, data row by data row (in the example, we assume that Bit 0 (Gross) and Bit 2 (Peak value 1) are set), by the values: C1, 1 (Gross) C1: Channel 1 C1, 1 (PV1) C2, 1 (Gross) C2, 1 (PV 1) ________________________________ New data row C1, 2 (Gross) C1, 2 (PV 1) C2, 2 (Gross) C2, 2 (PV 1) Each value (measurement) occupies 4 bytes (data formats 1253=LONG and 1257=FLOAT) or 2 bytes (data format 1255=INT). Integer formats are stored in INTEL (TM) format, i.e. MSB > LSB. The data format used for recording will determine how the source values are re-scaled for each channel: 1253 (LONG): physical value = (binary source value) / (256*7680000) * MR + OS 1255 (INT): physical value = (binary source value) * 256 / 7680000) * MR + OS 1257 (FLOAT): physical value = (binary source value) MR: measuring range OS: offset
NOTE
the 1253 LONG format includes status information in the least significant byte. To call this status, you should check this byte, before (!) you scale, as dividing by 256 will cause the least significant byte to be lost.
H-29
The structure of the Status byte is given below: Bit 0: Output of LIV 1 active, if set Bit 1: Output of LIV 2 active, if set Bit 2: Output of LIV 3 active, if set Bit 3: Output of LIV 4 active, if set Bit 4: Gross signal overflow, if set Bit 5: Net signal overflow, if set Bit 6: Calibration error, if set Bit 7: Amplifier settings changed during measurement (e.g. by remote control), if set
H-30
Auto start:
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
NOTE
You can store and recall all the settings (Start/Stop conditions etc.,) in a data acquisition parameter set. To be able to use the parameter set, you must assign two Function keys: a) Assign the function Recall data acquisition parameters to one Function key. Press the F-key to recall the parameter set. b) Assign the function Start/Stop data acquisition ( ) to a second Function key. Press the F-key to start the data acquisition program.
20.00 s...
No
50Hz
Time: 10 ...
The Auto start function defines what happens after a data acquisition parameter set has been recalled. YES: After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled data acquisition starts automatically. A second Function key is not needed. After the data acquisition parameter set has been recalled a second Function key must be used to start data acquisition ( ).
define... define...
Time stamp:
NO:
Param.set: You can enter parameter set numbers between 0 and 16 (0: parameter set is stored in the CP42 Flash-PROM; 1 16: parameter set is stored on the MGCplus hard disk). Numbers must first be assigned, for the next highest to be displayed.
save
read
H-31
Save Data acquisition parameters are stored in the chosen parameter set.
You can store up to 16 measurement value data acquisition programs on the MGCplus hard disk. Recall A data recording configuration, stored under a ParamSetNo., will be imported into the MGCplus. You can then view this data acquisition parameter set, or change it and re-save it, as required.
No
50Hz 20.00 s...
Time: 10 ...
define... define...
Time stamp:
save
read
H-32
System Interface
Interface
Use the Interface (Schnittstelle) function to set up the characteristics of the interfaces:
S S S
Baud rate Format (word length, parity, stop bit) Device address
The CP42 communication processor provides you with RS232, USB and Ethernet interfaces as standard. Example 1: Example 2: RS232 Format: 8N2 (meaning 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits) Ethernet
Interface setup RS232 ... USB ...

3
The IP addresses and the net mask

Ethernet ... IEC ...
AB locked during computer control
RS232 setup Baudrate: Format: 9600 Baud 8E1
An IP address always consists of 4 numbers. Each number must be in the range 1 to 254. Absolute exceptions are the numbers 127.x.x.x and 192.168.x.x. The first of these always designates the local host, i.e. your own machine. The numbers 192.168.x.x refer to special IP addresses which are not forwarded over a router. Thus if a network is numbered 192.168.x.x this automatically ensures that the network cannot be accessed from outside. The net mask can be used to determine and define which nodes form part of the in-house network. This net mask uses a bit pattern to indicate where the network ends and the computers in the network begin.
OK
cancel
System Interface
H-33
Examples: IP: 192.168.001.001 Mask: 255.255.255.000 This refers to a network with the number 192.168.1 and computer number 1 within that network
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
IP: 206.001.210.124 Mask: 255.255.000.000 This refers to a network with the number 206.1 and the computer with the number 210.124 Networks are divided into classes. Net mask 255.000.000.000 designated a Class A network. A total of 16,581,375 different computers can be included in this network. In the case of 255.255.0.0 there are still 65,025. This is called a Class B network. The most usual form of network is known as Class C. This has the net mask 255.255.255.0 and makes up some 99 % of all the commonly encountered networks. Up to 254 computers can be connected together.

3
Ethernet setup Adress: SubNetMask: Routeradress: 192.168.169.134 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0
OK
cancel
H-34
System Interface
Router If data packets are sent via node points, e.g. from the in-house network to the Internet or a WAN/LAN, a router is needed. This distributes data packets in different directions on the basis of their addresses. Routers are computers that have been specially designed for this purpose, and have their own operating system. It is their task to analyze millions of IP packets, read their headers and then forward them in the right direction.
IP address Subnet mask Router A address
Computer
Computer
Ethernet
Router A
Worldwide
Computer
Computer
Computer
Ethernet
Router B
System Interface
H-35
If you use a router to access an MGCplus measuring amplifier system from your PC, the address of its router must be specified in the MGC.
Direct Ethernet connection between a PC and MGCplus

Cross cable

Computer MGCplus

3
This is by far the most common type of connection. It requires a crossed patch cable, also known as a cross cable for short.
If your computer has an IP address of, say, 172.34.24.13, your MGCplus should have the IP address 172.34.24.x (x13, x255) if you are using a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. When connecting an MGCplus to a PC through a hub, you need to use a patch cable. As delivered, the Ethernet interface for your CP42 is configured as follows:
Ethernet setup Adress: SubNetMask: Routeradress: 192.168.169.134 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0
IP address = 192.168.169.134 Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 Router = 0.0.0.0
OK
cancel
H-36
System Interface
IEEE 488 Settings Adress: card type: 4 NI PCMCIA GPIB
IEC Settings for the IECbus connection with a PCMCIAGPIBcard (PCMCIAGPIB, NI488.2). Display and control panel in computer operating mode The display and control panel may be disabled whilst the computer is operating (factory setting) or can be active. In disabled mode only status information and measured values are updated.
OK
cancel
System Print
H-37
Print
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
Use the Print function to print out the settings for the AB22A/AB32 or the amplifier module and measured values. You can specify the required channels and signals for printing out the measured values under Selection. 1. Use the shift key to switch to the settings mode.
Password Save/load Recording Interface Print Language Time
2. Print 3. In the Pull-Up-menu select Print and confirm with .
You will then be in the Print settings window. 4. In the selection field, select Print via: the required interface and confirm with . A new settings window is opened under Format..., where the print format can be set.
USB Format...
PRINT Print settings via: AB Amplifier
5. Use
to select the device with which the settings should be .
Settings for signals to be printed Selection...
printed out (AB or amplifier) and confirm with
A new settings window is opened under Selection.... 6. Use

Channel 3 OK Abort All signals
OK SIGNAL PRINTING SELECTION Gross Net SPW 1 SPW 2 SPW 12 GW Status
to select the buttons whose settings are to be printed out. (nappears in the selection field). .
Confirm with 7. Use
to select the button OK and confirm with
H-38
System Language
Language
Use this function to select the language for the display, the menus and the Help texts.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
LANGUAGE
Language: English
English Deutsch Francais
System Time
H-39
Time
Use this function to set the date, the day and the time.
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
DATE/TIME SET-UP
Date: Day: Time Day ... Friday Hour ... Min ... Sec ... Month Year ...
H-40
System Time
I-1
Menu structure
I-2
Menu structure
I-3
The menu structure shown below is intended to help you find the set-up menus you are looking for more quickly. At the same time the necessary sequence of keys is specified for you. Structural components
F-key assignment in measuring mode (output status)
This key takes you to the first selection menu
Selection bar
or
The lines in the pull-up menu are displayed in tiled format.
A
If a menu does not fit on a page, it is divided. The letters in circles guide you to the next page.
Set-up window
Selection field
I-4
Menu structure
Symbols
mV/V
Selection field Edit field Button (starts action) Button (opens new set-up window) Activation fields
0.000000...
measure
measure...
Cursor keys Arrows show the direction in which the keys work
Menu structure
I-5
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Password
Authorisation of the operator Password protection System Password Save/Load Data acquisition Interface Print Language Time Display format F-keys Channel names Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Switch Remote contacts Limit switches Combine LIV Peak value stores Version OK Cancel Off Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Add user Change password User: New password: OK Cancel Password: Access: OK Operator Cancel Operator System Delete user User1: User2: User3: OK Miller Morgan delete delete delete Cancel
Display
Amplifier
Options
I-6
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or Save/Load
A
Save/Load setup Save...
Load... Copy
Factory setup...
OK Load parameter Channel Param.set CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516

1 1 1 1
Automatically from disk OK Cancel Load factory setup 1 All OK Cancel AB CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
Copy setup Copy from channel:
to amplifier channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 All Whole setup Remote contacts Limit switches Peak values OK Transducer Conditioning Display Analogue outputs Cancel
Save parameter Channel Param.set CP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516

1 1 1 1
OK
Cancel
Menu structure
I-7
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or Data acquisition
C
1Hz 3: 100 Hz 20.00 s... Time stamp: s min h 2Hz 3Hz 4Hz 5Hz 6Hz 8Hz 10Hz 15Hz 20Hz 25Hz 30Hz change 48Hz 50Hz 60Hz 75Hz 80Hz load 100Hz 120Hz 150Hz 10000s 160Hz 200Hz 240Hz 300Hz 400Hz 480Hz 600Hz 1200Hz 2400Hz 4800Hz 9600Hz 5000s 2000s 1000s 500s 200s 100s 50s 20s 10s 5s 2s
Data acquisition parameters Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz 2: 2400 Hz
Values: 1000 ... Time: Periods: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: File name: Acq. comment: Format: Reduction factor: Auto start: Param. set: Channel select OK Cancel all channels 2400Hz 1
No
define... 20.00 % ... Immediate Number of values file on HD MGCP0000.MEA ...
save
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb.PV Remote
4 Byte Integer MSB .. LSB 4 Byte Integer LSB..MSB 2 Byte Integer MSB..LSB 2 Byte Integer LSB..MSB 4 Byte Float MSB..LSB 4 Byte Float LSB..MSB
Immediate Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined
Number of values Trigger AND-combined Trigger OR-combined
I-8
Menu structure
Measure
System or
Display
Amplifier
Options or
Data acquisition
Data acquisition parameters Measuring rate/interval: 1: 2400 Hz 2: 2400 Hz 3: 100 Hz 20.00 s... Time stamp: s min h
Values: 1000 ... Time: Periods: 10 ... Channels/Signals: define... Trigger: Pre trigger: Start condition: Stop condition: Save to: File name: Acq. comment: Format: Reduction factor: Auto start: 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Param. set: 1
No
define... 20.00 % ... Immediate Number of values file on HD MGCP0000.MEA ... change 4 Byte Integer LSB...MSB 480 No Yes file on HD internal RAM
save
load
Define trigger Trigger: Start-Trigger 1 Off 1
Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 1 Start-Trigger 2 Start-Trigger 3 Start-Trigger 4 Stop-Trigger 1 Stop-Trigger 2 Stop-Trigger 3 Stop-Trigger 4 Start-Meas.rate-Trg. Stop-Meas.rate-Trg.
Signal:
Gross
higher lower lower higher
higher higher lower 0.000000% ... OK 0.000000% ... Cancel
Gross Net Store1 Store2
Off Measurement level Measurement band LIV1 LIV2 LIV3 LIV4 External trigger
Menu structure
I-9
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or Interface
D
Interface setup RS232... USB... 3 OK
Ethernet...
OK
Ethernet-setup USB-setup Address: Address: CP42p 00002 SubNetMask: Router address: OK RS232-setup Baud rate: Format: OK 9600 Baud 8E1 Cancel Cancel OK 172.20.14.182 255.255.0.0 0.0.0.0 Cancel
8N1 801 8E1 8N2 802 8E2
300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud 38400 Baud 57600 Baud
I-10
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or
or Language Time
E
Print Print setup through : AB
Print
Language RS232 Amplifier Language: English
Date/Time setup Date: Day: Time Day ... Friday Hour ... Min ... Sec ... Month Year ...
Setup of the signals to be printed Select...
OK
English Deutsch Francaise RS232 RS485 Printer
Select signals for printout Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV-Status OK
Channel 3
Cancel All signals
Menu structure
I-11
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Display format F-keys
or Channel names
Display Format Screen No: Type: 0 ... one value
one value
0...9
F-keys setup Level 1 ...
Level 1 Channel Name Channel 1
Channels/Signals: all Off Status line Off On all Selection
define...
free one value 3 values 6 values YT-Diagram XY-Diagram Status limit switch Data acquisition
F1: Tare F2: Zero/Cal/Measure One channel F3: Autocal One channel One channel F4: ...F-level
Channel name:
2ML55B
Select channel/signal OK Channel Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 LIV1 LIV2 LIV3 LIV4 Cancel All channels All signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 13141516
not assigned Tare Zeroing Clear stores Zero/Cal/Measure Autocal LED Status/Level LIV level Remote/Local Shunt On/Off Start/Stop display Print display Print values Print setup Load from XM001 Load next P-set Load previous P-set Switch display unit Start/Stop integration Start/Stop data acquis. Load DAQ param. set Load DAQ comments Linearisation on/off Ident
1 2 3 One channel All channels
I-12
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Transducer Conditioning Display
or
Transducer
Channel1
Conditioning Zero reference: Zero offset: Tare: Disable zeroing: Low pass 100 High pass Off
0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ...
Channel1 V
>0<
Display
Channel1
Type SG full bridge Excitation 5V kg Unit: mV/V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Zero pt.: 50.0000 ... 2.0000 ... Nom. val.: measure... K-Factor: 3 Adjust amplifier
0.0000 ...
measure
3 Hz
V V >T< Disable taring: 3 Bessel V
V Unit 3 Abs Decimal places 3 ... Display range from 10.000 V 10.000 V to Step 100
Bessel Butterworth V g kg t kt tons lbs N kN bar mbar Pa pas . . Off On 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000
mV/V V %
OK 1V 2.5V 5V

1st pt.: 2nd pt.: kg 0.0000 0.0000 OK mV/V Shunt off 0.0000 Measure 0.0000 Measure Cancel
Menu structure
I-13
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Analogue outputs Switch
Analogue outputs
Channel1
Switch >T< Autocal Param.set Ampl. Input Off Zero >0< Remote
Channel 1
Output Vo1: Gross Output Vo2: Net Output characteristics ppm V 0.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 1: 100.0000 ... 0.0000 ... Point 2:
Off Status
1intern. LED display
Gross Net Store1 Store2 Comb. PV
Off 5 Min once
Zero Cal Measure
1intern. 2intern. 3intern. 4intern. 5intern. 6intern. 7intern. 8intern.
Status Level
Off On
I-14
Menu structure
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Remote contacts Limit switches
or Combine LIV
G
Channel1
AND LIV 1 LIV 2 LIV 3 LIV 4
Remote contacts Remote Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8
On
Channel 1 Off On Limit switch 1 Limit switches Name Enable Input signal Level Hysteresis Direction Output logic Delay Input Message when ON Message when OFF free disabled Positive logic Negative logic Over limit Below limit LIV-Delay 12 3 4 LIV-On LIV-Off OK OK Delay time 0ms Cancel OK
Normal Inverse 1 .... 1-LIV1 ... No Gross 100.000 ... 1.000 ... Over limit Positive logic % %
Channel 1
no function no function no function no function no function no function no function no function
define...
free 1-LIV1 ON... 1-LIV1 OFF... Normal Normal
no function ACALautocal TARAtare CPV1clear store1 HLD1hold store 1 CPV2clear store2 HLD2hold store 2 ZEROzero balance SHNTShunt ON/OFF PRNTselect for printing CALinput to cal. signal NULLinput to zero signal INVchange sign PSEL1select line param. set 1 PSEL2select line param. set 2 PSEL4select line param. set 4 REMTRemote ON/OFF INTStart/Stop Integration
LIV 4 LIV 4 inverted Remote contact 4 Remote contact 4 inverted No Yes Gross Net Store1 Store2 Store12 AND OR EXOR NAND NOR NEXOR
1 2 3 4
Menu structure
I-15
Measure
System
Display
Amplifier
Options
or Peak value stores
or Version
Peak value stores (PVS) Store 1 Function Store 1 Envelope curve Store 2 Function Store 2 Envelope curve Comb. PVS 1-2 Off On
Channel 1 Maximum gross

Off Off 0.000... s 0.000... s
Version
KANAL 1
Identification: Comments:
HBM, RD002ML50B, P4.0A ...
Maximum gross
Serial and revisionnumber
Difference PVS1, PVS2 Mean PVS1,PVS2 Integrate gross Integrate net
Maximum gross Maximum net Minimum gross Minimum net
I-16
Menu structure
J-1
Specifications
J-2
Specifications Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules
J-3
1 1.1
Single-channel amplifier plug-in modules General data
Width Maximum sampling rate without linearisation
mm Measured values/s
20.3 (4 divs)1) 19200 4 Gross, net, peak values 100 to +100 of the range 1 of the range 0.0033 of the range 1.0 with Butterworth filter > 5Hz and Bessel filter > 1.25 Hz 2 Maximum; Minimum Peak-to-peak; Mean
Limit switches
Number Reference level Reference value (freely adjustable) Hysteresis factory setting Adjustment accuracy Response time % % % ms
Peak value stores

Number Function Tie Update rate s
30 with Butterworth filter > 250Hz and Bessel filter > 100 Hz inside 1ms, through remote contacts inside 1ms, through remote contacts
Clearing the peak value stores (switching to current measured value) Recording of the current value/peak value Time constant for envelope function s
0.01 ... 10000
Remotes (HCMOS) Inputs (8 lines, connectable as desired)

Permissible input voltage HIGH level LOW level Schmitt trigger, hysteresis Pull up resistances (internal) V V V V k 0.5 to +5.5 min. +4.0 max. +0.7 > 1.1 100
Outputs (Limit switches, Error)

HIGH level with max. 1mA LOW level with max. 0.7mA Internal resistance
1)
V V k
> 4.0 < 0.7 1
For the ML38B: 40.6mm (8divs)
J-4
Nominal (rated) temperature range Service temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages Card format (Euro) Weight Connection plug
C [F] C [F] C [F]

V mm g
20 ...+60 [4 ... +140] 20 ...+60 [4 ... +140] 25 ...+70 [13 ... +158] "14.6...17.0; (< 120mA) "7.7...8.3; (< 120mA)2) +4.9...5.1; (< 150mA) 100 x 160 300 IEC 603-2 indirectly
Analogue outputs Vo1 and Vo2

Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance The two output voltages can be used to display the five signal voltages. V k
"10V (asymmetrical) >5 <5 Amplifier output with zero balance Output staggered by the tare value Peak value store 1 output (maximum or minimum) Peak value store 2 output (maximum or minimum) Peak value store 3 output (peak combine of 1 and 2) "10 (asymmetrical) > 1000 1
Monitor output for Vo1 via BNC plug on front panel Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature (effect additional to digital value) on the outputs Vo1 and Vo2: sensitivity zero point
2)
V k k
% mV
< 0.08, typ. 0.04 < 3 typ. 2
also connectable to "16V
J-5
1.2
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML01B
Accuracy class DC amplifier Input for voltage measurement Input signal range (selectable) Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Zero offset Measurement frequency range Internal resistance of the signal voltage source Input for thermocouple measurement Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Linearisation error (with AP09 connection board) Linearisation range NiCr-Ni (K) Fe-CuNi (J) Cu-CuNi (T) NiCr-CuNi (E) NiCrSi-NiSi (N) Pt10Rh-Pt (S) Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh (B) Pt13RhPt(R) Max. internal resistance Temperature range for cold junction 2) Max. permissible common-mode voltage Input for current measurement Input signal range Measuring range (digitally adjustable) Max. measuring frequency range Zero offset, adjustable (living zero point)
1) 2)
0.03 symmetrical V V V Hz k
oC, [F] oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC
10.2 ...+10.2 "0.4 ... 10.2 "10 0 ... 2400 -1dB 1) v 1.3
0.0765 ...+0.0765 "0.002 ... 0.0765 "0.075 0 ... 250 1dB
< 0.06
10 ... 3275, [50 ... 5927] < 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N) < 0.6 (S, B, R) 191 ... +1414 190 ... +1192 237 ... +393 205 ... +1005 219 ... +1300 50 ... +1755 +160 ... +1814 50 ... +1769 1.3 20 ...+ 60, [4 ...+140] 62
158 ... +1414 167 ... +1192 210 ... +393 161 ... +1005 186 ... +1300 +181 ... +1755 +570 ... +1814 +178 ... +1769
k C, [F] V mA mA Hz mA
asymmetrical (to an internal 50 standard resistor) 50 ...+50 "4 ... 50 0 ... 2400 -1dB 0 ...50
With VI > 2.5 Vpp, note limited measuring frequencies Cold junction included in AP09 connection board
J-6
Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass
Nom. val. fc (Hz) 2400 3) 2000 3) 1000 4) 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 Nom. val. fc (Hz) 11004) 400 200 100* 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
1dB (Hz) 2400 2050 1050 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 1dB (Hz) 1100 445 235 117 38.5 22.0 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043
3dB (Hz) 3250 2350 1190 588 291 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.2 3dB (Hz) 1780 805 410 210 68 37.5 19.0 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075
Phase del. (ms) 0.28 0.40 0.66 0.90 1.45 3.65 6.0 11 20 42 Phase del. (ms) 0.45 0.7 1.1 1.8 4.3 7.4 12 22 50 100 200 650 1400 3000 0.1 1.0 10 0.16)
Rise time (ms) 0.105 0.170 0.336 0.64 1.3 3.8 7.0 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.23 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19.0 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600
Overshoot % 5.2 12 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Overshoot % 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bessel low pass
High-pass5)
from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu
Hz Hz Hz % % Hz VPP VPP K K 1.25 3 40
Absolute calibration deviation Linearity deviation Noise rel. to input with filter setting MR: 75mV MR: 10V Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N Type S, B, R
< 0.02 typ. 0.01 % of full scale 7) 100 75 120 typ. 0.1 typ. 1
*) Factory setting 3) Valid for Vipp < 2.5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 25% modulation of range) 4) Valid for V pp < 5V with Range = 10V (corresp. to 50% modulation of range) I 5) In the case of resistance thermometers and thermocouples: no function 6) 0.2 % during current measurement 7) For measuring ranges > 3V or > 25mV or > 10mA; otherwise < 0.1% of full scale
J-7
Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Meas. range 75 mV Meas. range 10V Thermocouples (Autocalibration on / off) Type J, T Type E, K, N Type S, B, R Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 and S2 with autocalibration on / off Sensitivity Zero point 10V range 75mV range 20mA range Thermocouples Type J, T Type E, K, N Type S, B, R V mV K K K 5 / 10 0.5 / 1 0.25 / 0.5 0.5 / 1 1/2
% mV V A K K K
< 0.02 typ. 0.01 / < 0.2 typ.0.1 < 0.2 / < 6 < 5 / < 50 < 4 / < 120 0.25 / 2.5 0.5 / 5 1 / 10

Residual carrier voltage (38.4 kHz) Long-term drift (over 48h) mVPP mV < 12 <3
J-8
1.3
Accuracy class Excitation voltage (" 5%) Transducer SG full and half bridge, potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer SG quarter bridge Piezoelectric transducer Current-fed piezoelectric transducers (e.g. DeltatronR from Brel&Kjaer) Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier DC amplifier Measuring ranges Strain gages (Low) potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High) Charge amplifier Bridge balance range Strain gages (Low) potentiometer, piezoresistive transducer (High) Charge amplifier Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass mV/V mV/V V (Hz) 10000 3000 2000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 8900 2920 2160 1010 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5 m V 10 5 *)
0.03 2.5 1
220...5000
110...5000
60...5000
30...5000
In conjunction with AP14 connection board In conjunction with AP08 connection board In conjunction with AP18i connection board max. 5001)
mV/V mV/V
" 0.10...3.06 " 10...306
" 0.20...6.12 " 20...612
" 0.40...12.2 4 " 40...1224
" 1.0...30.6 " 100...3060
Voltage input with max. " 2.5V amplitude " 3.06 " 306 6.12 " 612 " 2.5V (Hz) 9900 3480 2500 1165 588 291 99 49.9 25.5 12.4 6.2 (ms) 0.13 0.16 0.24 0.66 0.9 1.45 3.65 6 11 20 42 (ms) 0.05 0.116 0.15 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 % 19 1) 13 12 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 12.24 " 1224 30.6 " 3060
*) 1) 2)
Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS module For a max. of 25% modulation (UAPPmax=5V)
J-9
Measurement frequency range Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) (Hz)
3dB Phase Rise time del. (Hz) (ms) (ms) 0.0025 0.0025 0.004 0.2 0.44 0.96 1.8 5.4 9.3 19 37 75 155 300 1200 2300 4600
Overshoot % 10.8 10.8 6.6 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (High) (Low)
Analog output only (Digital Interface 5000 Hz Butterworth)
100000 100000 50000 1000 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
111000 188000 0.0027 104000 145000 0.0027 49000 84000 0.0044 900 400 230 117 38.5 22 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043 1800 800 405 210 68 37.5 19 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075 0.27 0.47 0.82 1.58 4.21 7.2 13.9 25 50 100 200 650 1400 3000 0.1 1.0 10 "6
High-pass
Hz Hz Hz V dB dB % V/V
Max. permissible common-mode voltage Common-mode-rejection Strain gages Potentiometers Linearity deviation Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on/off) Interference voltages at the output Noise related to the input with Bessel low pass 1000 00Hz 50 000Hz 10 000Hz 1000Hz 100Hz
>120 (DC) > 95 (DC) < 0.03 typ. 0.02 full scale < 0.1/0.2 Strain gage Potentiometer (0.2...6.12mV/V) (20...612mV/V) 4 3 3) 3 1.3 0.35 300 300 300 100 35
V/Vpp
*) 3)
Factory setting For half bridge 20V/V. We recommend that you measure only up to a cut-off frequency of 10kHz.
J-10
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 and S2 SG (Low): Sensitivity Zero point Potentiometer (High): Sensitivity Zero point Long-term drift (over 48 h) SG (Low): Potentiometer (High):
V/V
%
V/V V/V V/V
When autocalibration on: <0.03 <0.6 <0.03 <30 <0.25 <20
When autocalibration off: <0.2 <10 <0.2 <500 <5 <400

Residual carrier voltage Max. deviation of the analogue outputs from the digital value Long-term drift (over 48 h) mVPP mV mV <5 <10 <3
J-11
1.4
Accuracy class Carrier frequency Excitation voltage ( 5%) Transducer SG full bridge Hz V
0.03 600.15 "0.06 (synchronised) 600.00 "0.04 (unsynchronised)
5*)
2.5
SG quarter bridge Permis. cable length between transducer and amplifier m
110...5000 (VB= 5V) 60...5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30...5000 (VB= 1V) In conjunction with AP14 connection board 500 max. "0.1000 ... 3.0600 (VB = 5V) "0.2000 ... 6.1200 (VB = 2.5V) "0.5000 ... 15.3000 (VB = 1V) "3.06 (VB = 5V) "6.12 (VB = 2.5V) "15.3 (VB = 1V) Nom. val. fc 1dB (Hz) (Hz) 200 80 40 20 10 5 235 88 43 22 10.6 5.3 3dB (Hz) 277 103 51 26 12.7 6.3 3dB (Hz) 180 72 35.5 18 8.6 4.4 2.15 1.15 0.31 0.155 0.08 Phase del. Rise time Over(ms) (ms) shoot % 2.5 4.6 8.2 14 27 52 1.4 3.8 7.4 14 30 56 10 9 7 6 5 4
Carrier frequency amplifier

Measuring ranges mV/V
Bridge balance range
mV/V
Measuring frequency range Butterworth low pass
Bessel low pass
Nom. val. fc 1dB (Hz) (Hz) 100* 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 99 40 20 9.8 4.4 2.35 1.2 0.6 0.17 0.087 0.042
Phase del. Rise time Over(ms) (ms) shoot % 2.7 5.2 9.8 18 35 65 125 220 640 1400 3000 0.1 1.0 10 2 4.8 10 20 40 80 160 300 1100 2200 4600 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
High-pass
Hz Hz Hz
*)
Factory settings
J-12
Max. permissible commonmode voltage Commonmode rejection Max. differential voltage DC Residual carrier voltage (600Hz) Noise voltage Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off: Sensitivity Zero point Linearity deviation Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off)
V dB V V/VPP V/VPP
"6V > 50 (0 ... 600Hz) "0.1 < 0.3 1) < 0.3 (0...200Hz) < 0.03 (0...1.25Hz)
% V/V % V/V % V/V
< 0.01 typically 0.005% < 0.1 < 0.2 <2 < 0.02, typically 0.01 of full scale 2) <0.1/2

Residual carrier voltage Longterm drift (over 48 h)
1) 2)
mVPP mV
<3 <3
Measured with UB = 5V and input signal 2mV/V For ranges > 1mV/V (UB = 5V); otherwise <0.2%
J-13
1.5
Accuracy class Carrier frequency Transducer Resistors Resistance thermometers Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Hz m
0.03 75 0...5000 Pt10, Pt100, Pt1000 2001) to 5000 , PT1000 5001) to 500 , PT10, PT100

Measuring ranges Supply current Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass mAeff Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 15 10 5 Bessel low pass (Hz) 16 8.6 5.3 20 ... 500; 200 ... 5000 1; 0.1 3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 23 22 12.2 30 6.3 52 Rise time (ms) 16 30 56 Rise time (ms) 15 20 40 80 160 300 1100 2200 3700 Overshoot % 7 5 4 Overshoot % 1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 15 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 15 27 18 9.8 18 24 4.4 8.6 35 2.35 4.4 65 1.2 2.15 125 0.6 1.15 220 0.17 0.31 640 0.087 0.155 1400 0.042 0.08 2700 0.1 1.0 10 " 0.1 "1 " 2.5 " 0.25 " 0.25
High-pass2)
Hz Hz Hz K K K
Linearity variation 0...500 0...5000 Pt10 Pt100 Pt1000

1) 2)
100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS module No function available with resistance thermometers and thermocouples
J-14
Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on: sensitivity zero point with autocalibration off: sensitivity zero point Long-term drift (over 48 h) (Autocalibration on)
% m m % m
< 0.015 typ. 0.0075 % < 10 (Measuring range 500 ) < 100 (Measuring range 5000 ) < 0.2 < 0.5 (Measuring range 500 ) < 5 (Measuring range 5000 ) < 10 (Measuring range 500 ) < 100 (Measuring range 5000 )

Residual carrier voltage Long-term drift (over 48 h) mVpp mV <3 <3
J-15
1.6
Accuracy class Accuracy Carrier frequency Excitation voltage ("5%) Transducer SG full bridge Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier % % Hz V m 5*)
0.00251) "(0.0025 of measured value + 0.0025 of fullscale value) 225.05 "0.02 2.5 30...4000; typ.350 500 max.

Measuring ranges Bridge balance range Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass Nominal (rated) value f (3dB) f (attenuation=1000) f (attenuation=1 000 000) Settling time to 99% Settling time to 99.999% Bessel low pass Nominal (rated) value f (3dB) f (attenuation=1000) f (attenuation=1000000) Settling time to 99% Settling time to 99.999% Display resolution Commonmode rejection Input resistance
*) 1)
mV/V mV/V
"0.2 ... 5.1 (VB = 5V) "0.4 ... 10.2 (VB = 2.5V) "5.1 (VB = 5V) "10.2 (VB = 2.5V) Filter levels
Hz Hz Hz Hz s s
f1 1.0 1.1 18.9 50 1 2.3 f1 0.03 0.03 0.125 0.2 32 48
f2 1.5 1.6 21.6 54 0.7 1.6 f2 0.05 0.05 0.25 0.4 16 24
f3 2.5 2.3 24.5 57 0.5 1.14 f3 0.1 0.1 0.5 0.8 8 12
f4 3 3.2 27.4 61 0.37 0.82 f4 0.2 0.22 1 1.7 4 6
f5 5 4.6 30.5 65 0.26 0.58 f5 0.5 0.45 2 3.5 2 3
f6 6 6.3 33.8 68 0.2 0.42 f6 0.9 0.9 4 7 1 1.5
f7 9 8.3 37.3 70 0.16 0.30 f7 1.5 1.7 8 14 0.5 0.75
f8 10 10 41 72 0.13 0.23
Filter levels
Hz Hz Hz Hz s s digit
dB M
1 000 000 > 100 1000
Factory setting In the event of irradiation, in accordance with EN 61326, table 1 MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
J-16
Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): Sensitivity Zero point (related to full scale value) Linearity variation Longterm drift (over 24 h) Shortterm drift over 5 min, from 2 h after switchon Measuring rate
% % % ppm ppm 1/s mVPP mV
< 0.002 of measured value < 0.001 of fullscale value < 0.002 max. "20, typ. "8 max. "10, typ. "3 1.18 / 2.34 / 4.69 / 9.38 / 18.75 / 37.5 / 75 <3 <3

J-17
1.7
Accuracy class Carrier frequency Excitation voltage ("5%) Transducer Inductive half and full bridge Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier Hz V mH m
0.03 4801.2 " 0.48 (synchronised) 4800.0 " 0.32 (not synchronised) 2.5*) 2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V) 1 ... 30 (VB= 1V)1) 500 max. "6.00 ... 183.60 (VB = 2.5V) "15.00 ... 459.00 (VB = 1V) " 183.6 (VB = 2.5V) " 459 (VB = 1V) Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 1500 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10*) 5 3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 1600 2180 0.32 1010 1165 0.66 500 588 0.9 246 291 1.45 79 99 3.65 37.5 49.5 6 19 25.5 11 8.9 12.4 20 4.5 6.2 42 3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 1550 0.47 805 0.7 410 1.1 210 1.8 68 4.3 37.5 7.4 19 12 9.6 22 4.8 50 2.4 100 1.2 200 0.3 650 0.15 1400 0.075 3000 Rise time (ms) 0.17 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.25 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600 Overshoot. % 7 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Overshoot. % 4.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Measuring ranges Bridge balance range Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass mV/V mV/V
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 (Hz) 900 445 235 117 38.5 22 10.5 5.1 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.043
*) 1)
Factory setting with Zener barriers only VB = 1V
J-18
High-pass
Hz Hz Hz V dB V % V/VPP V/VPP
0.1 1.0 10 "6V > 50 (0 ... 4800Hz) "1 < 0.02, typ. 0.01 of full scale 2) < 0.33) < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0...100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25 Hz) < 20 / 60
Max. permissible commonmode voltage Commonmode rejection Max. differential voltage DC Linearity variation Residual carrier voltage (4800Hz) Noise voltage
Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on: sensitivity zero point with autocalibration off: sensitivity zero point
V/V
% V/V % V/V mVPP mV
< 0.03 typ.0.002% < 20 < 0.2 < 120 <5 <3

Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz) Longterm drift (over 48 h)
2) 3)
for measuring ranges > 60mV/V (VB = 2.5V); otherwise < 0.2% measured with VB = 2.5V and input signal 80mV/V
J-19
1.8
Accuracy class Carrier frequency Excitation voltage ("5%) Transducers Strain-gage half and full bridge Inductive half and full bridge S.G. quarter bridge Perm. cable length between transducer and amplifier m Hz V mH
0.03 4801.2 " 0.48 (synchronised) 4800.0 " 0.32 (not synchronised) 5*) 2.5 110 ... 5000 (VB=5V) 60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30 ...5000 (VB= 1V) 2.5 ... 30 (VB= 2.5V) 1 ... 30 (VB= 1V) In conjunction with AP14 connection board 5001) max. 1

Measuring ranges Strain gage mV/V "0.1000 ... 3.0600 "0.2000 ... 6.1200 "0.5000 ... 15.3000 "1.5000 ... 45.9000 "3.0000 ... 91.8000 "7.500 ... 229.500 mV/V "3.0600 "6.1200 "15.3000 "45.900 "91.8000 "229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V)
Inductive
Bridge balance range Strain gage Inductive
*) 1)
Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS module
J-20
Measuring frequency Butterworth/Bessel low pass High-pass from 0.2Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 2.5Hz Be; 5Hz Bu from 20Hz Be; 40Hz Bu Hz Hz Hz V dB V % V/VPP
see technical data ML50B
0.1 1.0 10 "6V > 50 (0 ... 4800Hz) "1 < 0.02 typ. 0.01 2) Strain gage < 2 (0...1500Hz) < 1 (0... 100Hz) < 0.2 (0...1.25 Hz) < 0.2 / 4 Strain gage Inductive < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0..100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25Hz) < 20 / 60 Inductive < 0.02 0.2 < 0.2 4 60 <4
Max. permissible commonmode voltage Commonmode rejection Max. differential voltage DC Linearity deviation Noise
Longterm drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on digital signals S1 and S2 with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off Sensitivity Zero point
V/V
% V/V % V/V

Residual carrier voltage Longterm drift (over 48h)
2)
mVPP mV
<5 <3
for measuring ranges > 1mV/V strain gage (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0,2%
J-21
1.9
Single-channel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6
Accuracy class Carrier frequency Excitation voltage ("5%) Transducer Strain gage half and full bridge Inductive half and full bridge Absolute calibration accuracy Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Hz V mH % m
0.03 9602.4 " 0.96 (synchronised) 9600.0 " 0.32 (not synchronised) 5*) 2.5 110 ... 5000 (VB=5V) 60 ... 5000 (VB= 2.5V) 30 ...5000 (VB= 1V) 2.5 ... 20 (VB= 2.5V) 6 ... 19 (VB= 1V) better than 0.5 5001) max. 1

Measuring ranges Strain gage mV/V "0.1000 ... 3.0600 "0.2000 ... 6.1200 "0.5000 ... 15.3000 "1.5000 ... 45.9000 "3.0000 ... 91.8000 "7.500 ... 229.500 mV/V "3.0600 "6.1200 "15.3000 "45.900 "91.8000 "229.500 (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB = 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB= 1V) (VB = 5V) (VB = 2.5V) (VB= 1V)
Inductive
Bridge balance range Strain gage Inductive
*) 1)
Factory setting 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS module
J-22
Measurement frequency range Butterworth low pass
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 3000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5 (Hz) 3100 1010 500 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5
3dB Phase del. (Hz) (ms) 3600 0.33 1165 0.66 588 0.9 291 1.45 99 3.65 49.5 6 25.5 11 12.4 20 6.2 42
Rise time (ms) 0.13 0.35 0.64 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.25 0.45 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600
Overshoot. % 16 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Overshoot % 4.1 1.3 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 900 1550 0.47 445 805 0.7 235 410 1.1 117 210 1.8 38.5 68 4.3 22 37.5 7.4 10.5 19 12 5.1 9.6 22 2.6 4.8 50 1.35 2.4 100 0.7 1.2 200 0.17 0.3 650 0.08 0.15 1400 0.043 0.075 3000 0.1 1.0 10
High-pass
Hz Hz Hz
*)
Factory setting
J-23
Max. permissible commonmode voltage Commonmode rejection Max. differential voltage DC Linearity variation
V dB V % V/VPP Strain gage
"6V > 77 (0 ... 9600Hz) "1 < 0.02, typically 0.01 2) Inductive < 100 (0...1500Hz) < 50 (0..100Hz) < 5 (0...1.25Hz) < 20 / 60 Inductive < 0.02 0.2 < 0.2 4 <6 <3 60 < 20
Noise
< 2 (0...1500Hz) < 1 (0... 100Hz) < 0.2 (0... 1.25 Hz) < 0.2 / 0.4 Strain gage
Long-term drift over 48 hours (Autocalibration on / off) Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net): with autocalibration on Sensitivity Zero point with autocalibration off Sensitivity Zero point
V/V
% V/V % V/V mVPP mV

2)
For measuring ranges > 1mV/V SG (VB = 5V) or > 30mV/V inductive; otherwise < 0.2%
J-24
1.10
Accuracy class Input signal Frequency F1 Direction of rotation F2 Zero index Transducer error (with AP01i only) Transducers that can be connected HBM torque transducers with AP07/1 with AP17 Frequency signal sources with square wave or sinusoidal voltage, incremental transducers Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Input level 5V set-up 100mV set-up (automat. gain control) Input impedance Detection of the direction of rotation Ranges Frequency measurement Hz
0.01 Inputlevel 0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOSlevel 0.1 .. 30 Vp (with control amplifier) or CMOSlevel CMOSlevel CMOSlevel T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1 T10FSF1, T10FSU2 kHz m VPP VPP k 0.0001 ... 1000 70 5...30 0.1...30 typ. 20 via additional frequency signal (phase-shifted by 90) 100...2000 1 000 ... 20 000 10 000... 200 000 100 000 ... 1 000 000 100 ... 1 000 000 1 000 000 2000 ...+2000 20 000... +20 000 200 000 ... +200 000 1 000 000 ... +1 000 000 "3 "1 " 0.2 disconnectable Glitch filter
Impulse counting Maximum impulse counting when pulse counting Zero point balance range Ranges to 2kHz Ranges to 20kHz Ranges to 200kHz Ranges to 1 MHz Noise (10 kHz input signal) Filter Off 1 kHz LPFilter, Butterworth 100 Hz LPFilter, Bessel Input filter
Pulses Imp./s Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
J-25
Measuring frequency range
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz)
3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 3100 2400 1200 570 291 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.2 0.4 0.5 0.8 0.9 1.45 3.65 6 11 20 42
Rise time (ms) 0.12 0.18 0.35 0.70 1.3 3.8 7 13.3 26 50 Rise time (ms) 0.35 0.52 0.86 1.7 5.1 9.4 19 35.5 70 135 280 1100 2200 4600
Over shoot % 8 10 8 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 Over shoot % 0 1.0 1.3 1.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Without filter Butterworth low pass
2000 1000 500 250 80 40 20 10 5
2500 2000 1000 470 246 79 37.5 19 8.9 4.5
Bessel low pass
Nom.val. fc 1dB (Hz) 900 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
3dB Phase del. (Hz) (Hz) (ms) 900 1800 0.6 400 800 0.8 235 410 1.1 117 210 1.8 38.5 68 4.3 22 37.5 7.4 10.5 19 12 5.1 9.6 22 2.6 4.8 50 1.35 2.4 100 0.7 1.2 200 0.17 0.3 650 0.08 0.15 1400 0.043 0.075 3000 0.1 1.0 10 0.005 <0.005 0.005 <5 <3
High-pass
Hz Hz Hz % % % mVPP mV
Absolute calibration accuracy Long-term drift over 90d Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the digital signals S1 (gross) and S2 (net):

Residual carrier voltage (38.4kHz) Long-term drift (over 48 h)
*)
Factory setting
J-26
Specifications Connection boards
Connection boards for one-channel amplifiers
AP01i
AP 02
AP01i (connection board with D-female receptacle) Width Transducer connection Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. AP02 (connection board for 2 relay modules) Width Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx. kg mm 20.3 (4 divs) 37-pin D-Sub male connector, DC-37P 3) 2x RM001 0.3 kg mm 20.3 (4 divs) D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1) D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) 2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02 0.3
AP03i
AP03i (connection board with MS-female device receptacle) Width Transducer connection Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx.
1) 2) 3) 4)
mm
40.6 (8 divs) 7-pin MSfemale receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4) D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) 2x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
HBM-order number 3-3312.0182 HBM-order number 2-9278.0293 HBM-order number 2-9278.0294 HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV
J-27
AP07/1
AP07/1 for connection of T3..FNA and T10.. torque transducers Width Supply during measurement Supply for calibration Frequency Transducer connection Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx.
2) 4)
mm VPP VPP kHz
40.6 (8 divs) 54 81 15 ... 20 7-pin MSfemale receptacle, MS3106A 16S-1P 4) D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) EM001; RM001
kg
0.5
HBM-order number 2-9278.0293 HBM-order number 1-MS3106 PEMV
J-28
AP08
AP08 for piezoelectric transducers Width Connections Transducer*) Range capacitors Cg Measuring ranges Accuracy Measuring range 100 pC Measuring range 100 pC Measuring frequency range 1000 pC/Cg=100 pF, 1 nF 10000 pC/Cg=10 nF 100000 pC/Cg=100 nF Linearity deviation Low pass filter Option Time constant ( t = Cg Rg) Long Medium (Rg=100G) Short (Rg=1G) Maximum cable length Range capacitor Cg=100 pF Range capacitor Cg 1 nF Zero offset (during zero/measure changeover) Drift (at 20C) Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the sensitivity on the zero point Operating temperature range Low pass filter Weight, approx.
*)
mm
20.3 (4 divs) BNC-female receptacle, isolated D25 female receptacle
nF pC % % kHz kHz kHz % s s m m pC pC/s
0.1 30...100
1 50...1000
10 500...10 000 "2.5 "1
100 5000...100 000
100 (1dB) 15 (1dB) 1.5 (1dB) "0.25 full scale according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B 1xEM001; 2xRM001 with AP02 10...10 000 0.1...100 100 200 < "1 0.1
% % C [F] kg
0.2 full scale 0.1 full scale 20...+60 [4...+140] according to the data sheets of ML01B and ML10B 0.3
Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms.
J-29
AP09
AP11i
AP09 for connection of thermocouples Width Accuracy with 25C with 20 ... 60C Transducer connection Temperature cold junction Reference-point measuring range Option Weight, approx. kg C [F] mm C C 20.3 (4 divs) "0.3 "1 Terminal screws (0.5...1.5mm2) Semiconductor temperature-sensor at the terminal screw 20...+60 [4...+140] 2x EM001; 2x RM001 with AP02 0.3
AP11i (connection board with LemoR-female device receptacle) Width Transducer connection Output-signal connection Option Weight, approx.
1) 2)
mm
20.3 (4 divs) 6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.306 1) D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) 2x EM001; 2xRM001 with AP02
kg
0.3
HBM-order number 3-3312.0126 HBM-order number 2-9278.0293
J-30
AP13i
AP13i for PLC I/O cards; all inputs and outputs are electrically isolated by optical couplers Width Values Separate grounding systems Nominal (rated) voltage (ext. supply) Permitted voltage range Output current Short-circuit current Permissible short-circuit period Switching frequency on resistive load Input/Output Option Inputs Values Separate grounding systems Input voltage for Low level High-level Input current at 24V Current consumption internal 5V external 24V Maximum power loss Permissible short-circuit period Permissible lead length Weight, approx. 8 4 V V mA mA mA W m kg <5 > 10 12 13 7.5 (without load) 10.5 unlimited approx. 1000 0.3 mm 20.3 (4 divs) 5 2 24 6 ... 48 max. 0.5 0.8 unlimited max. 500 D-female receptacle 15/25-pin 1x EM001 Outputs (short-circuit proof; protective circuit for inductive loads)
V V A A Hz
J-31
AP14
AP14 for Single SG Width Options Accuracy class Full bridge Half bridge Quarter bridge Connectable transducer to use with following amplifier plug-in modules Connections Transducer Analogue output, control signals Internal completion resistors Max. permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Linearity deviation Measurement frequency range Effect of 10K change of ambient temperature on zero point on measurement sensitivity Operating temperature range Weight, approx. m % kHz Full bridge % % C [F] kg 0.05 0.05 20...+60[4...+140] 0.3 mm % % % 20.3 (4 divs) 1 EM001 output stage module, 2xRM001 with AP02 0.1 0.5 0.5 Half and full bridges, single strain gage in 3-wire or 4-wire technology ML10B, ML30B, ML55B D15 female receptacle, DB25P D25 female receptacle, DB25P 120, 350, 700 500 0.05 0...50 Quarter bridge, half bridge 0.5 0.1
J-32
AP17
AP17 for connecting torque flanges T10FSF1, T10FSU2 and frequency signals to ML60B Width Transducer connection Analogue output/remotes Nominal (rated) temperature range Option Weight, approx. Outputs Transducer supply V (DC) V (DC) V (DC) V (DC) +16 (max. 500mA)3) 16 (max. 500mA)3) +5 (max. 300mA)3) approx. 5 (max. 100mA) kg C [F] mm 20.3 (4 divs) D15 female receptacle, DA-15P 1) D25 female receptacle, DB-25P 2) 20 ...+ 60 [4 ... +140] 1x EM001, 2x RM001 with AP02 0.3
Release of calibration signal Inputs Nominal (rated) input voltage symmetrical asymmetrical Minimum/maximum voltage swing symmetrical asymmetrical Common-mode voltage range Maximum input frequency
1) 2) 3)
VPP VPP VPP V0P V kHz
10 5 0.3 / 14 3 / 20 5 ...+ 4 1000 (with ML60B max. 200)
HBM order number 3-3312.0182 HBM order number 2-9278.0293 The specified current values are the maximum permissible permanent currents for AP17. The number of con nection boards per housing is not limited, however, a maximum of four connection boards can be used for the transducer supply (5V/16V e.g. for T10FSF1 torque flange).
J-33
AP18i
AP18i for current-fed piezoresistive transducers Accuracy class Width Transducer excitation*) Current source dynamic impedance Input voltage range Load resistance Input sensitivity Frequency response Input sensitivity 0.1V Input sensitivity 1V Input sensitivity 10V Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature Noise referred to the input (2Hz...22.4kHz) Input sensitivity 0.1V Input sensitivity 1V Input sensitivity 10 V Distortion Option Weight, approx.
*)
% mm mA k V k V for 1 dB for 3 dB for 1 dB for 3 dB for 1 dB for 3 dB Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz %
1 20.3 (4 divs) 2.5...20 (adjustable); 4 (factory setting) 30 typ. 12 "9 (3...21V) >5 0.1; 1V; 10V ( "0.05 dB ) 0.18...15 000 0.10...25 000 0.18...17 000 0.10...31 000 0.18...22 000 0.10...43 000 0.04 of full scale
Vms Vms Vms dB dB
30 30 75 70 (typically) 60 (typically) Current output stage
at 1kHz at 8 kHz
kg
0.3
Please note the advices on page B-55, if the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms.
J-34
Specifications Multi-channel amplifier plug-in modules
Multi-channel amplifier module ML455
ML455 + Connection board Accuracy class Accuracy Carrier frequency Bridge excitation voltage ("5%) Connectable transducers*) in 6- (5) wire technique % Hz V
AP455i/AP455iS6 0.1 "(0.1 of measured value+0.1 of fullscale value) 4801.2"0.48 2.5 Strain-gage half- or full bridge Inductive half- or full bridge LVDT m mV/V mV/V mV/V W mH Strain-gage < "3 < "0.5 < "0.2 < "0.1 Autocal on % % C [F] < "0.01 < "0.005 20...+60 [4 ... +140] 4x15-pin Sub-D 6-pin LemoR FGG.1B.3064) mm 20.3 (4 divs) 100 "4 "100 "1000 120 ... 1000 4 ... 330 Inductive < "30 < "3 < "1.5 < "0.5 < 0.02 Autocal off < "0.03 < "0.01 LVDT < "140 < "28 < "14 < "6
Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board1) Measuring ranges Strain-gage Inductive LVDT Transducer impedance Strain-gage half- or full bridge Inductive half- or full bridge, LVDT Noise at 25C [77F] Butterworth/Bessel 1000 Hz/40 Hz 80 Hz/200 Hz 20 Hz/5 Hz 5 Hz/1.25 Hz Linearity deviation Effect of a 10Kchange of the ambient temperature on sensitivity2) on zero point3) Operating temperature range Transducer connection AP455i AP455iS6 Width
*) 1) 2) 3) 4)
mV/V mV/V mV/V mV/V %
The transducer type can be selected separately for each of the four subchannels Use cable twisted and shielded in pairs with outer shield (e.g. HBM-no. 43301.0071) Of measured value Of fullscale value HBM-order number 3-3312.0126
J-35
Multichannel amplifier module ML455 and connection board AP455i

ML455
ML 455
AP455i
AP455iS6
AP455iS6
Subchannel 1
Subchannel 2
Subchannel 3
Subchannel 4
J-36
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML460
ML460 + connection board Accuracy class Connectable transducers HBM torque transducers2) Frequency signal sources with square-wave or sine-wave voltage, incremental transducers Inductive rotation speed measuring devices (T-R coils) using input filtering Measuring ranges Frequency measurement
AP460i 0.011) T4WA-S3, T3...FN/FNA, T10F...KF1, T10F...SF1, T10F... SU2 0.0001...500 0.5...200
kHz kHz
kHz
Accuracy, related to fullscale value Pulse counting Maximum impulse rate when pulse counting Precision PWM carrier frequency Precision Pulse duration Precision Input frequency range Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages
% Pulses PPS Kimp Hz % ms ms Hz _C _C _C V
0 ... 2 0... 20 0 ... 200 0 ... 500 0.01 100 ... 1 000 000 500 000 0.001 1 ... 10 000 0.05 0 ... 2500 0.001 0.25 ...10 000 20 ...+ 60 20 ...+ 60 25 ... +70 +5 (<240 mA) +16 (<100 mA) +8 (<10 mA) 8 (<10 mA) 10 Europe 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) LemoR 1B 10pin EXG.1B.310.HLN Fixed plug (1st letter in model desig.) : F Key (3rd letter in model desig.) : G Series: 1B Type: 310 Example: FGG.1B.310.CLAD62 (Bold characters must be selected)
Max. number of amplifier modules per 19 housing with battery operation (NT011T) Card format Width Connections Designation of suitable male connector (Manufacturer LemoR)
mm mm
1) 2)
0.05 in the case of PWM These torque transducers are not supplied via the connection plate AP460i
J-37
Channel properties Number of subchannels Class accuracy Signals per subchannel F1 F2 Zero index Electrical separation of all inputs from one another and from MGC ground Input frequency range V kHz 4 0.01 Frequency, pulse or PWM signal 90 phase shift relative to F1 (direction detection) For detection of zero position in pulse counting Typically 500V 0...500
J-38
Input signals Direct inputs, difference signals Input voltage range Direct inputs, bipolar Input voltage range Direct inputs, unipolar Input voltage range Minimum pulse width Input for inductive transducer, filtered (F1 signals only) Required minimum input voltage (peak-to-peak) 500 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 25 kH 50 kHz 75 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 150 kHz 175 kHz 200 kHz Maximum input voltage Input resistance F1 signal Transducer excitation Maximum current per module 5V 8V 16V 16 modules/device 10mA 62.5mA 62.5mA 1 module/device 160mA 1A 1A V k V ms 5...30 3 VPP 0.4 ... 30 VPP 0.4 ... 30
50 mV 100 mV 750 mV 1V 1.5V 2V 2.5V 3V 4V 5V 7V 30 approx. 6
J-39
Measuring frequency range
Nom. val. fc 1dB (Hz) (Hz) 740 450 250 83 41 20 9 5
3dB Phase del. Rise time (Hz) 1750 550 290 99 49.5 25.5 12.4 6.5 (ms) 1 1.5 2.5 5 7.5 12 25 46 (ms) <0.6 1 2.1 6.2 13 24 50 100
Over shoot % 0 9.4 12 8.5 7.8 7 4.7 4.7 Over shoot % 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Without filter LowPass with ButterworthCharacteristic
500 250 80 40 20 10 5
LowPass with BesselCharacteristic
Nom. val. fc 1dB (Hz) 400 200 100*) 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 (Hz) 380 235 125 43 24 11 4 2.6 1.35 0.7 0.17 0.08 0.04
3dB Phase del. Rise time (Hz) 650 380 210 70 40 18 10 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.3 0.15 0.075 (ms) 1.4 1.5 2.6 5.2 7.4 15.7 27 53 104 195 730 1480 3000 (ms) 1 1.75 3 7.5 15 31 55 125 210 450 2000 3700 7500
J-40
ML460 multi-channel amplifier module and AP460i connection board

ML460
ML460
AP460i
AP460i
ERROR O V E RL O A D S I GN A L
CHAN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Subchannel 1
Subchannel 2
Subchannel 3
Subchannel 4
J-41
Multi-channel amplifier plug-in module ML801B
ML801B + connection board Accuracy class Number of measuring points Transducers
AP8011) 0.05 8 "10V symmetrical
AP8092)
AP4093) 0.2 4 Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N, S, B, R, Individual inputs electrically isolated
AP8354) 0.05 8 Pt100 4wire circuit
Thermocouples Type K, J, T, E, N, S, B, R
Width Maximum sampling rate per channel Measuring frequency range Effective resolution Max. permissible input voltage and common-mode voltage Absolute calibration deviation with cold junction Filter Butterworth low pass
mm values/s kHz Bit V % K Nom. val fc (Hz) 1000 500 250 200 80 1000 500 250 200 80 250 200 80 40 20 10 5 50 10
20.3 (4divs) 2400 0 ... 1 20 50 0.05 0.5 fg max 1dB (Hz) 1189 523 253 203 78 1206 613 255 203 78 312 226 82 41 21 10 5.3 3dB (Hz) 1518 691 322 265 103 1516 816 327 264 102 413 300 109 54 27 13 7 Internal sampling rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 4800 4800 4800 4800 4800 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 150
1) 2) 3) 4)
Connection plug on customer side: e. g. Phoenix Contact MC1.5/3-ST-3.5; Art. No. 1840379 (Connection plug for AP801S6: LemoR FFA0B.304 CLAD52) No line break recognition Two AP409 can be operated with one ML801B Connection plug on customer side: LemoR FFA.0S.304.CLA
J-42
ML801B + connection board Low pass Bessel
AP801 Nom. val fc (Hz) 200 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
AP809 fg max 1dB (Hz) 259 102 41 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.21 0.1 0.051 fg max 1dB (Hz) 1076 596 279 214 78.9 38.7 19.5 9.36 4.37
AP409 3dB (Hz) 448 184 75 36 18 9 4.5 1.8 0.9 0.38 0.19 0.094 3dB (Hz) 1282 798 345 266 103 51.8 27.2 13.2 6.4
AP835
Internal sampling rate 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 150 75 37.5 18.7 Internal sampling rate 4800 4800 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200
Low pass Butterworth compatible Nom. val fc (Hz) 1000 500 250 200 80 40 20 10 5
J-43
ML801B + connection board Low pass Bessel compatible
AP801 Nom. val fc (Hz) 200 100 40 20 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05
AP809 fg max 1dB (Hz) 322 125 41 21 11 5.5 2.7 1.36 0.68 0.186 0.093 0.047
AP409 3dB (Hz) 571 216 70 37 19 9.6 4.8 2.4 1.2 0.186 0.158 0.079
AP835
Internal sampling rate 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 600 300 75 37.5 18.7
Input for voltage measurement Input range Zero offset Internal resistance of the voltage source Input resistance symmetric/asymmetric Noise voltage rel. to input at 1.25 Hz filter Longterm drift over 48 hours with/without autocalibration Linearity deviation Transducer excitation5) (only AP801S6) Supply voltage for transducers (can only be selected collectively for all channels) Max. output current for external transducers V mV V mV k k mVSS mV % 500/250 < 50 0.8/1.5 <0.03; typ. 0.01 10.5...+10.5 80...+80 10.5...+10.5 80...+80 < 1.0 2000/1000 < 0.5 0.01/0.02 <0.03; typ. 0.01 1000 <2 0.02/0.05 <0.06; typ. 0.03 80...+80 80...+80
V mA
8/16 50
5) A total of max. 2 A for transducers supply may be withdrawn from the MGC
J-44
ML801B + connection board Input for thermocouples Linearisation error C C Linearisation range NiCrNi (K) FeCuNi (J) CuCuNi (T) NiCrCuNi (E) NiCrSiNiSi (N) Pt10RhPt (S) Pt30RhPt6Rh (B) Pt13RhPt (R) Temperature range of cold junction Longterm drift over 48 h with/without autocalibration Type K, J, T, E, N Type S, B, R Noise with 1.25Hz filter Type K, J, T, E, N Type S, B, R Input for Pt100 Measuring range Linearisation error Linearisation range Noise voltage with 1.25Hz filter Measuring current Permissible cable length between transducer and amplifier Linearity deviation Longterm drift over 48h with autocalibration C C mpp mA m K m K K K K C C C C C C C C C
AP801
AP809 < 0.06
AP409 < 0.25 (K, J, T, E, N) < 0.6 (S, B, R)
AP835
158...+1414 167...+1192 210...+393 161...+1005 186...+1300 +181...+1755 +570...+1814 +178...+1769
191...+1414 190...+1192 237...+393 205...+1005 219...+1300 50...+1755 +160...+1814 50...+1769 20...+60
0.2/0.4 1.0/2.0 < 0.1 < 0.3
0.5/1 2/3 < 0.1 < 0.3
500 < 0.02 200 ... +848 2 0.5 3006) "0.1 < 30
6) 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS module
J-45
ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class Measuring range Max. common mode input voltage (to housing/ground) Max. differential input voltage Input impedance Commonmode rejection (with 50 Hz, 20 VPP) (with DC "10 V) Measurement frequency range Linearity deviation Effect of a 10Kchange of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) Autocal on Autocal off on sensitivity Autocal on Autocal off ESD resistance channel to housing/ground ESD resistance channel to channel Transducer connection Hz % % V V V MW
AP401 0.1 "10 "45 "70 20 typ. 75 min. 100 1000 (1 dB) "0.03
% % % % V (DC) V (DC)
max. "0.02 max. "0.05 max. "0.02 max. "0.05 "400 "400 4pole female connector, compatible to LemoR Serie S, Size 0, contact arragement 304, fitting connector: e.g. FFA 05 304 CLAC52 (LemoR)
Width Operating temperature range
mm C [F]
20.3 (4 divs) 20...+60 [4...+140]
J-46
ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class Connectable transducers*) Transducer identification Transducer excitation Input voltage range Measuring ranges Measurement frequency range Lower limit frequency (3 dB) Linearity deviation Noise Filter characteristics Measuring range "0.05 V Measuring range "0.5 V Measuring range "5 V Effect of a 10Kchange of the ambient temperature Measuring range "0.05 V on zero point (related to full scale) Width Operating temperature range
*)
AP418i % 1 4 currentfed piezoelectric transducer (e.g. Deltatront) T-ID and TEDS compatible mA V V Hz Hz % 4 2 ... 20 "0.05; "0.5; "5 1000 (1 dB) 0.72 0.05 5 Hz Bessel/500 Hz Butterworth < 25 m/< 60 m < 25 m/< 0.35 m < 100 m/< 3.5 m Measuring range "0.5 V und 5 V 0.03 20.3 (4 TE) 20...+60 [4...+140]
VPP VPP VPP
% mm C [F]
0.1
If the transducer connection cable is used outside of closed rooms, please regard the advices on page B-55.
J-47
ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class Transducers that can be connected Excitation voltage (DC) Transducer resistance at UB Rmin (full bridge) Rmax Measuring ranges V mV/V 10V 330 %
AP810 0.1 8 S.G. half or full bridges 10; 5; 2.5; 0.5 5V 160 4000 "4 (VB=10V) "8 (VB=5V) "16 (VB=2.5V) "80 (VB=0.5V) approx. 1 (with 350 S.G. full bridge) approx. 0.5 (with 350 S.G. half bridge) Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <"0.15 <"0.3 <"0.6 <"3 D25 female receptacle m mm % Hz % % C [F] 200 20.3 (4 divs) 0.05 500 (1dB) 0.05 0.1 20...+60 [4...+140] 2.5V 120 0.5V 120
Control signal (Shunt) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency UB=10V UB=5V UB=2.5V UB=0.5V Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width Linearity deviation Measurement frequency range Effect of a 10Kchange of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity Operating temperature range
mV/V
Hz mm/m mm/m mm/m mm/m
1.25/5 <"0.025 <"0.05 <"0.1 <"0.4
200/500 <"1.8 <"3.5 <"7
J-48
ML801B + connection board Accuracy class Transducers that can be connected Internal completion resistors Excitation voltage (DC) Measuring ranges V mV/V %
AP814Bi 0.1 7) 8 S.G. quarter bridges in three wire technique 120, 350, 700, 1000 8) 5; 2.5; 1; 0.5 "8 (UB=5V) "16 (UB=2.5V) "40 (UB=1V) "80 (UB=0.5V) approx. 1 (at 350 ) Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <"0.3 <"0.65 <"1.5 <"3.5 D25 female receptable m mm % Hz % % C 2009)10) 20.3 (4 divs) 0.05 500 (1dB) 0.1 0.1 20...+60
Control signal (shunt) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency UB=5V UB=2.5V UB=1V UB=0.5V Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width Linearity variation Measurement frequency range Effect of 10K change in ambient temperature on the zero point (related to the fullscale value) on sensitivity Operating temperature range
7)
mV/V
1.25/5 <"0.05 <"0.1 <"0.25 <"0.45
200/500 <"2.5 <"6.5 <"13
The error influence caused by asymmetrical cable resistances, is not included in the accuracy class. 8) Option 9) Use connection cable with wire cross section w0.25 mm2! 10) 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS modul
J-49
ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class Transducers that can be connected %
AP815i 0.111)12) 8 S.G. full bridges in six wire technique or 8 S.G. half bridges in six wire technique or 8 S.G. half bridges in five wire technique or 8 S.G. quarter bridges in four wire technique or 2 S.G. rosettes V mV/V 120, 350, 700, (optional 1000) 5; 2.5; 1; 0.5 "8 (VB=5V) "16 (VB=2.5V) "40 (VB=1V) "80 (VB=0.5V) 1.0078 " 0.1% (at 350) Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <"0.6 <"1.2 <"3 <"6 2 D25 female receptacle m mm % Hz % % C 20013) 20.3 (4 divs) 0.05 500 (1dB) 0.112) 0.1 20...+60
Internal completion resistors Excitation voltage (DC) Measuring ranges
Control signal (Shunt) Noise at 350 W Filter characteristics Filter frequency VB=5V VB=2.5V VB=1V VB=0.5V Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width Linearity deviation Measurement frequency range Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity Operating temperature range
11) 12) 13)
mV/V
1.25/5 <"0.1 <"0.2 <"0.5 <"1
200/500 <"4 <"8 <"20 <"40
0.2 with irradiation according to EN 610043:1996 + A1:1998 0.2 with 5 Vexcitation 100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS modul
J-50
ML801B + Connection board Accuracy class Transducers that can be connected Excitation voltage (DC) Transducer resistance Rmin Rmax Measuring range Noise Filter characteristics Filter frequency Transducer connection Permissible cable length between transducer and connection board Width Linearity deviation Measuring frequency range Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point (related to full scale) on sensitivity Operating temperature range m mm % Hz % % C V mV/V Hz mV/V 1.25/5 <"0.01 %
AP836 0.1 8 potentiometric Transducers 5 190 5000 "500 Bessel/Butterworth 40/80 <"0.05 D25 female receptacle 200 (100 m max. distance between connection board and TID/TEDS modul) 20.3 (4 divs) 0.05 500 (1dB) 0.05 0.1 20...+60 200/500 <"0.5
J-51
Multichannel amplifier connection boards
AP801
for 8 DC voltage sources
AP801S6
for 8 voltage sources with voltage supply 8V/16V
AP801S6
AP809
for 8 thermocouples
AP409
for 4 thermocouples
AP835
for 8 RTD Pt100
AP836
for 8 potentiometric Transducers
14
13
25
14
13
25
J-52
Multichannel amplifier connection boards
AP810
for 8 S.G. half or full bridges
AP814Bi
for 8 S.G. quarter bridges in three wire technique
AP815i
for 8 S.G. quarter, halfor full bridges
14
14
14
13
25
13
25
13
25
14
14
13
25
13
25
AP401
for 4 DCvoltage supplies (electrically isolated)
AP418i
for 4 currentfed piezoelectric transducers (compatible with T-ID and TEDS)
J-53
Programmable plugin module ML70B
Analogue outputs Max. number of analog outputs Analogue outputs update rate Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance Residual carrier voltage (76.6 kHz) Long-term drift (over 48h) Effect of ambient temperature at 10_K: Sensitivity Zero point Programming Programming language Data program memory (volatile) Data program memory (non-volatile) Code program memory (volatile) (2 x available for online change) Code program memory (non-volatile) Memory for project sources (non-volatile) Call frequency of the IEC program Number of subchannels Effective computer output kByte kByte kByte kByte kByte Hz IEC611313 224 16 2 x 160 160 192 2400, synchronized with MGCplus measured-value processing 1...128 (set by user) 75,000 float operations/s or 300,000 integer operations/s Hz V k mVPP mV % mV 2 (10 with AP78) 2400 " 10V asymmetrical >5 <5 < 12 <3 < 0.08 typically 0.04 < 3 typically 2
J-54
Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages _C [F] _C [F] _C [F] V 20 ...+ 60 [4 ...+140] 20 ...+ 60 [4 ...+140] 25 ... +70 [13 ...+158] +14.6 ... +17.0 (<90 mA) 14.6 ... 17.0 (<100 mA) 7 ... 9 (<10 mA) Europe 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) DIN 41612 indirectly 0, 1 or 2 AP71 (2 CAN interfaces) AP72 (2 serial interfaces) AP75 (8 Digital-In, 8 Digital-Out, 24V level) AP78 (8 analog outputs)
Card format Width Connector Supported connection boards Number of controllable connection boards Supported connection board types
mm mm
AP72 Connection board

Interfaces Baudrate Electrical isolation Connector Mechanics Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Nominal (rated) voltages Card dimensions Width _C _C _C V mm mm 20 ... +60 20 ... +60 25 ... +70 +5 ... (< 100 mA) 102 x 112 20.3 (4 division units) kBaud V 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 115.2 Typ. 500 9pol.SubD female receptacle
J-55
ML70B Programmable module and AP72 Connection board

ML70B AP72
J-56
Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6 with AP71 Connection board (CANbus)
CAN interface Number of CAN interfaces Protocol Baud rate Line length Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN interface Connection technique Measurement recording Number of recordable signals 25 Max. number of signals (16-bit-signals with 4 signals per message Database with parameter information on the CAN signals Size of databases Database storage Mechanical values Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltage 128 Byte max. 128 each CANport1) Signals per second 50 72 100 36 400 8 2) 1200 1 ... 83) Baud m 10k 1000 20k 1000 50k 1000 2 CAN 2.0B 125k 500 250k 250 500k 100 1M 25
Standard High Speed ISO 1189824V Fault Tolerant Low Speed 2x 9-pin DSUB, individual potential separation of supply and ground
2 (one database per CAN interface) 2x 100k non-volatile in ML71B flash memory
_C [F] _C [F] _C [F] V
20 ... +60 [4 ...+140] 20 ... +60 [4 ...+140] 25 ... +70 [13 ...+158] +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 90 mA) 14.6 ... 17.0 (< 100 mA) 7 ... 9 (< 10 mA) Europe 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) DIN 41612 indirectly
Card format Width Receptacle

1) 2) 3)
mm mm
Maximum 256 channels per CP42 For operation with more than 8 subchannels For 8channel operation
J-57
Type Analogue output The analogue output can display one of the max. 128 input signals at a time Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance Nonlinearity Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on the sensitivity Effect of a 10K-change of the ambient temperature on zero point V k % % mV
ML71B/ML71BS6
"10V asymmetrical >5 <5 < 0.05 < 0.08 typ. 0.04 3 typ. 2
J-58
Communication module ML74 with AP74 connection board (CANHEAD)1)
CANinterface Connection board Protocol Baud rate Line length Hardware bus link individually selectable for each CAN interface Maximum bus length (without branches) 2) 120 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.8W/CANHEAD kBaud m
AP74 CAN 2.0B 250 250 ISO 11898 350 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.15W/CANHEAD
700 Ohm; 2.5 V 1000 Ohm; 2.5 V P=1.0W/CANHEAD 165 180 200 220 250
No. of CANHEAD 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Measurement recording Max. number of CANHEAD modules Number of subchannels CANHEAD power supply Cut off current Cutoff upon current to earth Mechanical values Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Card format Width
1) 2) 3)
90 100 110 120 135 155 180 220 250
140 155 170 190 215 250
12 10 ... 120 3) A A _C _C _C mm mm 2 0.1 20 ... +60 20 ... +60 25 ... +70 Europa 100 x 160 20.3 (4 TE)
Only with CP22 or CP42 (not with CP32B). The housing must be of type B or C. Thin Media Cable (0.38 mm2) at ambient temperature of 45 C Max. 256 channels each CP42
J-59
Communication module ML77B with AP77 Connection board (Profibus DP)1)
Protocol Baud rate Profibus ID number Potential separation Connection technique Measurement transmission Supported formats V Baud
Profibus DP slave as per DIN 192453 9.6k ... 12M 04A9 (hexadecimal) typ. 500 9pin DSUB 4 Byte Integer 2 Byte Integer 4 Byte Float (IEEE) 4 Byte Float (Siemens) 4 Byte raw values 2 Byte raw values Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz _C [F] _C [F] _C [F] V 2400 1200 2400 2400 1200 800 20 ... +60 [4...+140] 20 ... +60 [4...+140] 25 ... +70 [13...+158] +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 200 mA) 14.6 ... 17.0 (< 200 mA) +7 ... +9 (<10 mA) 100 x 160 20.3 (4 divs) DIN 41612 indirectly kg approx. 0.3
Transmission rate at Profibus Float; 24 signals Float; 48 signals Integer 32 bit; 32 signals Integer 16 bit; 48 signals Integer 16 bit; 88 signals Integer 16 bit; 120 signals Mechanical values Nominal (rated) temperature range Service temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages
Card format (Euro) Width Connector Weight

1)
mm mm
Only in systems with CP42 or in systems without a communications processor.
J-60
10
Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B
ML78B + connection board Analogue outputs Max. number of analogue outputs
AP78
AP75
10 (2 filterable outputs, 1 of which is also accessible via the front panel on the ML78B) V Hz bit 22) V k mVPP mV % mV Typically 2001)
2 (both outputs filterable 1 also accessible via the front panel on the ML78B) 2400 16 1, isolated from dig. grounding systems
Electrical isolation Analogue outputs update rate D/A conversion resolution Grounding systems Nominal (rated) voltage Permissible load resistance Internal resistance Residual carrier voltage (76.6 kHz) Long-term drift (over 48h) Effect of change in ambient temperature of 10K Digital inputs Max. number of digital inputs Input voltage range Electrical isolation Low potential High potential Grounding systems Control functions for MGCplus channel groups
"10 asymmetrical 5 <5 < 12 <3 < 0.08; typically 0.04 < 3, typically 2 8 (16)3)
V V V V
0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V) Typically 500 <5 >10 1, isolated from the digital output Autocalibration on/off; Reset; Tare; Peak value clear/hold; Synchronisation of internal curve generator
1) 2) 3)
The filterable digital outputs are not electrically isolated! 1 grounding system for 2 digital filterable analogue outputs and 1 grounding system for the remaining 8 analogue outputs When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs
J-61
Digital outputs Max. number of digital outputs Output voltage range Output current Short-circuit current Electrical isolation Response time Grounding systems Excitation Possible function assignment for the outputs V Curve generator Max. number of curves Update rate (each channel adjustable) Max. number of curve points Mechanical Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Operating voltages Card format / width Connection technique Permissible connection board configurations
4) 5)
8 (16)4) V A A V ms 0 ... 30 (nom. 0 ... 24V) 0.5 1.5 Typically 500 <4 1, isolated from the digital inputs 18 ... 30 (nom. 24); external Combine Limit Value for up to 120 MGCplus channels Acknowledgement signal for input Settings by means of an external software command Overflow message for groups of measurement channels 10 Hz 1; 2; 5; 10; 20; 50; 100; 200; 600; 1200; 2400 128000, permanently storable in flash memory C [F] C [F] C [F] V mm 25pin SubD 20 ...+ 60 [4 ... +140] 20 ...+ 60 [4 ... +140] 25 ...+ 70 [13 ... +158] +14.6 ... +17.0 (< 100 mA)/ 17.0 ... 14.6 (< 90 mA)/ 9.0 ... 7.0 (< 10 mA) Euro 160 x 100 / 20.3 (4divs) Plug-in screw terminals 1 x AP78 / 1 x AP75 / 1 x AP78 and 1 x AP75 / 2 x AP755)
When using 2 AP75 connection boards: 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs Analogue outputs VO1 and VO2 are both available on both connection boards
J-62
Connection boards for ML78B AP75 AP78
Specifications System devices
J-63
11
System devices
System devices MGCplus*)

Mains supply Supply voltage Max. input nominal (rated) current Start-up current Battery supply Battery voltage Max. input nominal (rated) current Start-up current Max. power consumption Nominal (rated) temperature range C [F] Type of protection V AC A A V DC A A W 115V/230V 25+15% 2.2/1.3 <20 12V/24V 25+15% 11.5/5.5 <30 150 1...16 slots, desktop housing 10 ... +55 [14 ... 131] desktop housing IP20 19 rack frame 10 ... +55 [14 ... 131] 19 rack frame IP20
*) MGCplus COMPLIANCE OF STANDARDS: The MGCplus system is tested according to the harmonized European standards EN61326 and EN61010 Therefore it achieves the protection aims of EEC directive 89/336EEC in the field of electromagnetic compatibility and EEC directive 73/23/EEC in the field of electrical safety of low voltage equipment. Mechanical stress is tested according to European Standard EN6006826 for vibrations and EN60068227 for shock. The equipment is exposed to an acceleration of 25 m/s2 within the frequency range of 5...65 Hz in all 3 axes. Duration of this vibration test: 30min per axis. The shock test is performed with a rated value of 200 m/s2 acceleration during 11 ms, half sine pulse shape, with 3 shocks in each of the 6 possible directions.
System devices MGCsplit

Power supply 1NT650 Input voltage (nominal/rated) Ridethrough during startup Output voltage Output current (continuous load) Protection against operating errors Permissible relative humidity Degree of protection Connections V V V A % 12, 24 and 42, onboard network (9 V to 58 V) 3 (0.1 s); 6 ... 9 (10 s) 28 "10 % > 3.5 Protection against sustained shortcircuit and false polarity 100 (with dew point transition) IP65 Voltage supply: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 4 pole, 60 encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32BFC-T04LPH0-6000) CAN and On/Off control signal: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 6 pole, 30 encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32BAC-T06MPH0-6000) Split-Line: ODU Minisnap, Series B, Type S3, Size 2, 16 pole, 0 encoded, (matching connector e. g. S32B0C-T16PFG0-7500) CAN, digital control line I2C (load currents, errors) Contactor (push button) MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
Startup from standby mode Status exchange with CPxx Control elements
J-64
System devices MGCsplit (continued)

Modules *) Function Degree of protection Operating temperature range Nominal (rated) temperature range Permissible relative humidity Supply voltage Connections C [F] C [F] % V S SplitLine Input/Output S As on the resp. connection boards 95 at 40 C [104 F] 1SH400 1SH650 1SH400CP Enclosure for the communication processor IP40 20 ... +60 [4 ... +140] Enclosure for one MLxx amplifier and max. two connection boards (each 4 divs wide) IP40 30 ... +70 [22 ... +158] IP65 30 ... +70 [22 ... +158] 20 ... +60 [4 ... +140] 100 18 ...32 S SplitLine Input/Output S ODU connectors (LemoR compatible) S Connection for ABX22A S With CP22 and CP42: 100 Mbit-Ethernet; USB; RS-232-C 95 at 40 C [104 F]
Weight without amplifier and connection board, approx. Dimensions (W x H x D)

*)
kg mm
1.6 104 x 146 x 205
See MGCplus system specifications for measurement properties of amplifier modules. Split-Line Total length Max. number of measurement modules Baud rate Bus termination m Meas./s 25 (from 1SH400CP through last module) 16 307,200; 4byte format (like MGCplus) Connected automatically
J-65
CP42 Communication processor

Width Interfaces RS-232-C USB1) (master/slave) Ethernet Data transfer rate Ethernet (128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz) USB (32 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz) PC card harddisk approx. 109 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz 128 channels/sampling rate 2400 Hz Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight Extension (optional) I/O contacts Potential separation Connection technique 2 x In, 2 x Out, 24 V, GND Input voltage level LOW Input voltage range HIGH Input current, typically, high level = 24 V Input current, typically, high level = 10 V Output level active high at 0 A Output level active high at 0.5 A Power supply (external) Output current, max. Short-circuit current, typically Short-circuit period
1)
mm Potential separation typ. 500V No typ. 500V Measured values/s Measured values/s Measured values/s Measured values/s C [F] C [F] C [F] kg
60.9 (12 divs) Connection technique 9-pin Dsub female connector USB female connector RJ45 Baud rate 115.2 kBaud 12 MBaud (fastmode) 100 MBaud
307 200 (4byte format) 76 800 (4byte format)
262144 (4byte format) 307200 (2byte format) 10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131] 10 ... +55 [+14 ... +131] 25 ... +70[13 ... +158] approx. 0.6 PC card harddisk, up to 5 GByte, ATA standard
V DC V V mA mA
500 Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long) 0 ... 5 10 ... 24 12 3 Level supply minus 0.7 V Level supply minus 3 V
V A A
24 (11 V ... 30 V) 0.5 0.8 unlimited MGCplus with AB22A / AB32
Cable length v 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible.
J-66
CP22 Communication processor

Width Interfaces RS-232-C USB2) (master/slave) Ethernet Data transfer rate Ethernet (64 channels/4byte measured values/sampling rate 2400 Hz) USB (24 channels/4byte measured values/sampling rate 2400 Hz) Nominal (rated) temperature range Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight I/O contacts Potential separation Connection technique 1 x In, 1 x Out, 24 V, GND Input voltage level LOW Input voltage range HIGH Input current, typically, high level = 24 V Input current, typically, high level = 10 V Output level active high at 0 A Output level active high at 0.5 A Power supply (external) Output current, max. Short-circuit current, typically Short-circuit period
2)
mm Potential separation No No Yes Measured values/s Measured values/s C [F] C [F] C [F] kg V DC V V mA mA
40.6 (8 divs) Connection technique 9-pin Dsub female connector USB female connector RJ45
Baud rate 38.4 kBaud 12 MBaud (fast mode) 10/100 MBaud
153 600 57 600 20 ... +65 [4 ... +149] 20 ... +65 [4 ... +149] 25 ... +70 [13 ... +158] approx. 0.6 500 Screw terminals (line less than 30 meters long) 0 ... 5 10 ... 24 12 3 Level supply minus 0.7 V Level supply minus 3 V
V A A
24 (11 V ... 30 V) 0.5 0.8 unlimited
Cable length v 5 m; Cable extensions are not permissible.
J-67
RM001 Relay module

Input voltage Resistance Response time Release time Relay breaking capacity max. voltage max current max. power V k ms ms V A VA V mA mechanical electrical (at nominal (rated) load) Weight, approx Switching cycles Switching cycles kg 0/5 12 maximum 5 maximum 25 42 1 30 +8; 8 34 50 x 106 100 x 103 0.1
Operating voltage Power consumption Relay-module life
EM001 Output stage module

Input Input voltage Input resistance Output Impressed voltage Impressed current Load resistance Measuring frequency range Operating voltage Power consumption Weight, approx V mA kHz V mA kg "20 / 4 ... 20 maximum 500 10 +16; 16 35 0.1 minimum 0 10 ... +10 V k 10 ... +10 12.5
J-68
Mobile display and control unit ABX22A

Illuminated display Front width Current consumption (8V) Length of cable (6-wire) Connector type mm mA m No 111.8 (22 divs) 20 1.5 Linkage connector, in accordance with DIN 45326, Series 723, 8-pin, No.09-0171-15-08
Display and control panel AB22A/AB32

Display Key panel Password Dialogue Display formats Weight, approx kg AB22A AB32 Backlit LCD display, resolution 192x64 pixels Vacuum-fluorescent display (VFD), resolution 192x64 pixels Keypad (alphanumeric), 4 function keys, cursor keys and 5 dialogue keys. All keys are touch-sensitive with real keys beneath. There is a facility for protecting certain operating levels with a password. Menu languages: German/English/French 1, 3, 6 values; ty graph, xy graph; Status limit switch 0.5
K-1
Index
K-2
Index
K-3
A
AB22A, control elements, D-3 AB22A/AB32 display, measuring mode, D-6 first display, D-5 menus, D-13 save setup, D-17 selection menus, D-18 setup mode, D-11 AB32, control elements, D-4 absolute/relativ to base, G-8 ABX22A, J-68 connecting, B-8 activation fields, D-19 , I-4 adaptation to the transducer current and voltage measurement, E-52E-55 inductive transducer, E-31 piezoelectric transducer, E-66E-69 piezoresistive transducer, E-78E-81 potentiometric transducer, E-83E-86 resistance temperature detector, E-55E-57 resistors, E-58E-61 rotation speed, E-45E-49 SG transducer, E-20 thermocouples, E-49E-51 amplifier first measurement, E-18 setting up, E-4 angle of rotation measurement, B-38 AP74 connection board, B-98 auto start, H-30 autocal, F-24
B
battery connection, desktop housing, B-4 battery operation, B-4 blank plate, B-8 bridge resistance, B-49 button, D-19 , D-22 , I-4
C
calling up menus, D-13 CANHEAD, connecting, B-96 channel names, G-27 channel number, D-9 channel selection in measuring mode, D-15 channel selection in setup mode, D-16 Combine limit switches, F-12 commissioning, C-3 Communication module ML71B/ML71BS6, J-56 Communication module ML74, J-58 Communication module ML77, J-59 Communications processor CP22/CP42, insert, A-17 compensating resistor, B-19 , E-21 , E-29 Completion resistor, B-20 computer, connecting, B-99 conditioning, E-13 conditions on site, A-35
K-4
Index
Conformity, L-1 connecting, A-1 , B-1 , C-1 , D-1 , E-1 , F-1 , G-1 , H-1 , J-1 Connecting separate TEDS modules, B-13 Connecting transducer, LVDT, B-17 connecting transducers, B-12 DC power source, B-48 DC voltage sources, B-44 frequency generator, B-51 , B-52 impulse transducer, B-53 inductive full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 inductive half bridge, B-16 piezoelectric transducers, B-55 piezoresistive transducers, B-56 potentiometric transducers, B-57 resistors, Pt10,100, 1000, B-49 SG full bridge, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 SG half bridge, B-16 shunt resistor, B-100 single strain gage, B-19B-21 thermocouples, B-42 torque flange, T10FSF1, T10FSU2, B-26 torque measurement shaft, T4WAS3, B-38 torque transducer T1A, T4A/WAS3, T5, TB1A, B-37 T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1, B-33 Connection board, AP460i, Pin assignment, B-28 connection board AP02, B-111 AP07/1, B-113 AP74, B-98 AP77, B-119 connection boards, J-26 AP01i... AP18i, connecting, B-105 connector pin assignment, AP17, B-109 current value, F-20
D
data acquisition, D-7 , G-3 , G-22 data acquisition comment, G-22 , H-25H-29 data acquisition parameter, H-15 , H-17 , H-23 , H-24 , H-25 , H-26 , H-30 , H-31 , I-8 data acquisition parameter set, H-30 data acquisition program, H-17 , H-19 data storage, D-17 DC power source, connecting, B-48 DC voltage source, connecting, B-44 define trigger, H-18 device structure, A-15 dialogue boxes, D-19 direct input, D-15 display channel names, G-27 display format, G-3 Fkeys, G-23 display format, G-3 distributor board VT810/815i, connect, B-60 Distributor board VT814i, connecting, B-59 documentation, A-8 Rotation speed measurement, T10FSSF1, T10FSSU2 (symmetrical signals), B-31
E
earthing switch, B-3 , B-4 , B-5 edit field, D-19 , D-21 , I-4 envelope curve, F-21
Index
K-5
error messages, D-10 Evaluate F2 signal, E-64 Extended functions, E-64 external trigger, H-21 External triggering, B-108
Greenline, B-11 guidelines, A-9
H
housing, MGCplus desktop housing, A-13 hysteresis, F-8
F
Fkeys, G-23 factory settings, of remotes, AP01i...AP14, B-108 feedback circuits, B-37 file name, G-22 , H-24 filter high pass, E-15 low pass, E-15 final stage module, B-115 AP01i and AP03i, B-120 AP07/1, B-121 AP08/14/17/18i, B-122 AP09 and AP11i, B-124 AP13i, B-116 format, H-25H-29 fourwire connection, B-12 , B-21 , B-37 , B-49 frequency generator, connecting, B-51 , B-52 frequency measurement, without direction of rotation signal, B-51 , B-52 Frequency quadrupling, E-64 fuse, B-4 , B-5
I
impulse counting, B-53 impulse transducer, connecting, B-53 inductive full bridge, connecting, B-14 inductive half bridge, connecting, B-16 input, letters and numbers, D-21 Inputs and outputs, CP22/CP42, B-101 , B-104 integration, F-4 , F-18
L
language, H-38 desktop device, C-6 level, H-22 limit switch delay time, F-9 setting up, F-8 limit switches, F-7 , F-11 setting up, F-6 LVDT, connecting, B-17
G
Glitch filter, E-44 , E-48 , E-64 graphic display, G-17
M
mains connection, desktop housing, B-3 maintenance and cleaning, A-36
K-6
Index
Measurement, Torque transducer, E-37 measurement band, H-20 measurement of, impulses/frequencies, E-61E-64 measurement with, piezoresistive transducers, E-75E-78 measuring rate trigger, H-17 , H-18 measuring with, inductive transducer, E-31E-35 menu, pullup menu, D-13 menu structure, I-1 , I-3 menus, exiting, D-14 MGC Compact, C-5 MGCsplit CAN bus connection, AP71, B-89 Connecting, B-62 , B-75 Connecting to MGCplus systems, A-27 Enclosure dimensions, A-32 Enclosure versions, A-20 Inputs/outputs AP13i, B-81 , B-82 , B-83 AP17, B-85 , B-86 , B-87 AP75, B-93 , B-94 , B-95 AP78, B-90 , B-91 , B-92 ML/AP module, B-76 LED display, A-24 ADDRESS, A-26 ERROR, A-24 LINK, A-24 Rx/Tx, A-24 SYNC, A-24 Measurement module IP40, A-21 Measurement module IP65, A-22 Power supply units NT650/NT651, B-63 Processor module, A-23 Transducer connection AP13i, B-84
AP17, B-88 AP401, B-78 AP409, B-77 AP460i, B-80 AP815i, B-79 ML38B, Extended functions, E-7 ML74 communication module, B-97 mode, H-19 , H-22 Multichannel amplifier connection boards, J-51 , J-52 Multichannel amplifier module ML455, J-34 Multichannel amplifier plugin module ML460, J-36 Multichannel amplifier plugin module ML70B, J-53 Multichannel amplifier plugin module ML801B, J-41 Multichannel I/O module ML78, J-60 multichannel module, D-9 multiplier, B-115
N
number, G-6
O
onechannel amplifier plugin modules, general data, J-3 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML01B, J-5 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML10B, J-8 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML30B, J-11 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML35B, J-13
Index
K-7
onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML38, J-15 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML50B, J-17 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML55B, J-19 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML55BS6, J-21 onechannel amplifier plug-in module ML60B, J-24 onechannel module, D-9
potentiometric transducer, connecting, B-57 potentiometric transducers, E-83 connecting, B-58 Pre trigger, H-23 print, H-37 printer, connecting, B-99
P
parameter set, F-24 password, H-3 peak value, F-19 peak value stores, F-15 combine, F-16 controlling, F-18 switch off, F-15 , F-22 periods, G-22 , H-15 piezoelectric transducer, connecting, B-55 piezoelectric transducers, E-66 piezoresistive transducer, E-75 piezoresistive transducers, E-78 connecting, B-56 pin assignment AP01i...AP14, B-107 AP01i/03i/08/09/11i/14/17/18i, B-106 AP02, B-111 AP07/1, B-113 AP13i, B-116 , B-119 PLC, connecting, B-99 Polynomial curve, cubic, E-7
R
recording measurement series, H-14 reduction factor, H-26 relay contacts, AP01i...AP14, B-111 relay module, B-111 remote, F-3 remote contacts, F-3 , F-4 AP13i, B-118 remotes, B-101 assignment AP01i...AP14, B-108 factory setting, B-108 function, F-3 resistors, E-58 PT10, 100, 1000, connecting, B-49 RM001, B-111 rotation speed and angle of rotation measurement, T4WAS3, B-38 rotation speed measurement T10FSF1, T10FSU2 (symmetrical signals), B-29 T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1 (asymmetrical signals), B-35
K-8
Index
Rotation speed measurement with inductive transducers, B-41
stop condition, H-24 stop trigger, H-17 switch, F-24 synchronization, CP22, B-6 system language, H-38 password, H-3 print, H-37 save, H-9 time, H-39 system description, A-10 system devices, J-63
S
safety instructions, A-3 remaining dangers, A-3 save, H-9 security prompt, D-17 selection field, D-19 , I-4 selection fields, D-20 selection levels, D-18 serial interfaces, B-99 setup window, D-19 setting up, basic parameters, E-3 setup menu, G-4 SG full bridge, connecting, B-14 , B-15 , B-18 , E-6 half bridge, connecting, B-16 single strain gauge, connecting, B-19 transducer, connecting, B-12 shielding design, B-11 shunt resistor, connecting, B-100 single strain gauge, connecting, B-19B-21 slot number, D-9 start condition, H-23 start trigger, H-17 status data acquisition, G-22 status limit switch, G-21 Status line, D-8 status line, G-7
T
TEDS, Connection, B-13 TEDS transducer, E-9 thermocouples, E-49 connecting, B-42 threewire connection, B-49 time, H-39 time stamp, H-16 torque flange T10FSF1, T10FSU2, B-26 torque measurement T10FSF1, T10FSU2, B-26 T1A, T4A/WAS3, T5, TB1A (slip ring or direct cable connection), B-37 T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1 (squarewave excitation voltage), B-33 Torque transducer, E-37 torque transducers (T1A, T4A/WAS3, T5, TB1A), connecting, B-37
Index
K-9
torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1), B-33 transducer connection distributor board VT814i, B-59 potentiometric transducers, B-58 , B-60 Transducer error input active, E-64 trigger, external, H-21 trigger condition, H-17 , H-22 trigger function, H-17 trigger level, H-22 type, G-6
V
version, F-23 voltage drop, B-5
Y
YTDiagram, G-17
Z
Zero index input active, E-64
K-10
Index
xxx
Modifications reserved. All details describe our products in general form only. They are not to be understood as express warranty and do not constitute any liability whatsoever.
Hottinger Baldwin Messtechnik GmbH

Postfach 10 01 51, D-64201 Darmstadt Im Tiefen See 45, D-64293 Darmstadt Tel.: +49/61 51/8 03-0; Fax: +49/61 51/ 8039100 Email: support@hbm.com www.hbm.com
B0534-18.0 en

HBM MGCplusAB22A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HBM MGCplusAB22A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Manual

A-3 A-8 A-10 A-13 A-15 A-17 A-20

Conditions on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

B-8 B-11 B-12

Torque flange T10FSF1, T10FSU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

4.8.2 4.8.3 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.10

Torque transducers (T3...FN/FNA, T10FKF1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting the MGCsplit modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Connecting CANHEAD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-99 B-100 B-101

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

B-120 B-121 B-122 B-124

D Functions and symbols on the AB22A/AB32

AB22A/AB32 in set-up mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

3.5 3.6 3.7

D-17 D-18 D-19

Adaptation to the transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Strain gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductive transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10

Current-fed piezoelectric transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Combine limit switches (one-channel modules only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting peak values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Status limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status data acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Recording measurement series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-32 H-37 H-38 H-39

Menu structure Specifications

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

10 Multi-channel I/O amplifier module ML78B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Safety instructions

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Safety instructions

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Safety instructions

Symbols indicating application notes and useful information:

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Safety instructions

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Safety instructions

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Notes on the documentation

Notes on the documentation

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction Notes on the documentation

Example: Connections SG full bridges, induct. half bridges B-15

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction System description

MGCplus with AB22A/AB32

Introduction System description

Digit remote contacts, limit switches

filtering, scaling, zero balancing, etc.

filtering scaling, zero balancing, etc.